JP7287550B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and when the game medium wins one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players ( for example, Patent Document 1).
In this type of gaming machine, a plurality of predetermined detecting means for detecting game media that have won a prize in a corresponding winning hole, and electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detecting means, and a process for giving a game value to a game are provided. A game value imparting means for execution and a process execution means electrically connected to the game value imparting means for executing a predetermined process are known. The game value imparting means stores in advance reference information that is information used in processing for imparting a game value to a game and that is referenced for detection by the predetermined detection means. This reference information differs depending on the model of the gaming machine.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046

On the other hand, the process execution means is also required to execute a predetermined process based on this reference information, while the process execution means does not pre-store reference information that differs depending on the model at the time of manufacture from the viewpoint of facilitating manufacturing. There was a request to make it like this.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. To provide a game machine which enables reference information referred to by a game value imparting means to be used without being stored in advance in a process executing means electrically connected to a game value imparting means and executing a predetermined process. .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a shooting means, a flow-down area in which game balls shot by the shooting means flow down, and game balls that have passed through a predetermined area of the flow-down area are detected. a game ball guidance member provided corresponding to a part of the predetermined area and controlling passage of the game ball to the corresponding predetermined area; the plurality of predetermined detection means; game value imparting means for executing processing for imparting a game value to a game; imparting means for imparting a game ball as the game value; electrically connected to the game value imparting means; Predetermined processing for indicating the game value to be provided based on information relating to passage of the game ball to the predetermined area provided with the game ball guide member is executed without transmitting/receiving a control signal to and from the providing means. wherein the game value giving means is information used in a process for giving a game value to the game, and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means. and a first reference information storage means for storing reference information to be stored in the game machine; a first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means to the processing execution means; second transmission means for transmitting to the process execution means a predetermined information signal based on the entered ball information, which is the received information; second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to an information signal; said predetermined information signal transmitted from said second transmission means; and said reference information stored in said second reference information storage means execution means for executing the predetermined process based on information; processing result information storage means for storing processing result information that is information relating to the result of processing of the predetermined process by the execution means; and based on the processing result information and display control means for controlling predetermined display means, wherein the first transmission means transmits the reference information regardless of whether or not the reference information is held in the second reference information storage means. An information signal is transmitted to the processing execution means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there are a launching means, a flow-down area where the game balls shot by the launching means flow down, and a plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area of the flow-down area. , a game ball guiding member provided corresponding to a part of the predetermined area and controlling the passage of the game ball to the corresponding predetermined area; Game value giving means for executing processing for giving a game value; giving means for giving a game ball as the game value; and electrically connected to the game value giving means for transmitting and receiving a control signal to and from the giving means. a processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing for indicating a game value to be imparted based on information relating to the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area provided with the game ball guide member without performing The game value giving means stores reference information that is information used in processing for giving a game value to the game and that is referenced for detection by the predetermined detection means. a first reference information storage means, which stores the first reference information after a predetermined supply of electric power to the gaming machine is started and before execution of specific processing for progressing the game is started; a first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the means to the processing execution means; a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information to the processing executing means, the processing executing means transmitting a reference signal corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means; second reference information storage means for storing information; the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means; and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means. execution means for executing the process of; processing result information storage means for storing processing result information that is information relating to the result of the predetermined process by the execution means; and control of predetermined display means based on the processing result information. and display control means for transmitting the reference information signal to the processing execution means regardless of whether or not the reference information is held in the second reference information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the reference information can be used without being stored in advance in the processing execution means.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a pending|holding ball storage area, and a pending|holding ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, (c) is the number of balls held is 2 (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hits in the case of (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a (normal) variation pattern table for losing when the number of held balls is 2 and (e) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table when the number of held balls is two. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the number-of-balls table. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing switch reading processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 10 is a flow chart showing a role product ratio management main process executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows a part of setting information reception processing executed by the role product ratio management chip in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows a part of setting information reception processing executed by the role product ratio management chip in the main controller. 10 is a flow chart showing a role product ratio calculation process executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows inspection result output processing executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, (c) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller in the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing winning information saving processing executed by the role product ratio management chip in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows inspection result output processing executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 26, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). there is

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the so-called super ready-to-win effect, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as will be described later, the ball fired to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning hole (second starting hole 64b to be described later. 2.) is triggered by entering the ball (starting winning), and after the symbol (the third symbol described later) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed determines the starting winning. This is an effect for presenting the player with the result of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not).

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects, such as the variable effects described above and the ready-to-win effects executed during the variable effects, are designed to be performed according to the themes given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effect is not performed, or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed change invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Further, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in the variable effect performed by the third pattern display device 81, when the normal ready-to-win is developed into the super ready-to-win, the selection screen of the super ready-to-win` effect mode during the normal ready-to-win is displayed as the third pattern. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81 .

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the super ready-to-win effect mode are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, the performance mode of super ready-to-win is determined based on the performance mode candidate selected when developing to super ready-to-win, and super ready-to-win is executed by the third pattern display device 81 according to the performance mode.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. , rearward, rightward and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the super ready-to-win production mode may be selected.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. The ball shooting interval of the ball shooting unit 112a is set at about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62 for guiding the ball, a first normal winning opening 63a, 2nd normal winning opening 63b, 1st starting opening 64a, 2nd starting opening 64b, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. can be attached to The first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate, by the lighting state of the LEDs 37a, the variable display performed when the ball enters (start winning) into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, or the variable display. As a stop pattern after the end, a pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is a big win or not is determined (big win lottery), and if it is determined to be a big win, the type of the big win. is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation executed with the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “2R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during the so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change, probability change state), in other words, a special game state (jackpot ). The high-probability state (during variable probability, variable probability state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol described later is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second start port 64b.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to the time when the probability is not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged, resulting in the second start port 64b. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to enter.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning the second symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory described later attached to the second start port 64b is opened, or one time by the second symbol It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessary is opened by winning. Specifically, in the time saving state, the time for which the electric accessory associated with the second start port 64b is opened is made longer than in the case other than the time saving state, or the number of times the electric accessory is opened per time. may be made larger than in the case other than the time saving state. Also, in the time-saving state, at least two of increasing the winning probability of the second symbol, lengthening the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory may be performed at the same time. good.

A first normal winning opening 63a is provided on the lower left side of the game area, and a second normal winning opening 63b is provided on the lower right side of the game area. When the ball enters the first normal winning opening 63a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first normal winning opening switch 208c is turned on. 8 balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the ball enters the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is turned on. As a result, 8 balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls when the balls enter the first normal prize opening 63a and the number of prize balls when the balls enter the second normal prize opening 63b are not necessarily the same. The number of prize balls may be different, such as 8 balls for the latter.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 and a second pattern display device 83 . The third symbol display device 81 is triggered by entering a ball into one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (starting winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 , and a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display (variable effect) of the third pattern. The second pattern display device 83 is provided with a second pattern display device 83 composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by passage of the ball through the through gate 67 . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of, for example, an 8-inch large liquid crystal display. and three symbol columns to the right are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In the pachinko machine 10, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main controller 110, while the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It is performed by the third pattern display device 81 . Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is attached to the lower right side of the attached symbol in a small green color and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned on the activated line L1. ) is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability-variable state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main patterns (corresponding to "high-probability patterns") to which odd numbers are added are aligned on the effective line L1. On the other hand, when shifting to a low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "low-probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable display (variation effect). The main display area Dm is the main display area Dm, and the upper one-third of the other area is the sub display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like. In addition, in the central part of the lower base side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. A symbol row Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number of held balls display area Db is the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which the variable display (variation effect) has not been performed among the balls entered into the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. This is the area that displays

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b while the variation effect (variation display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the number of reserved balls display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number pattern ("●" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. .

That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved ball numbers is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is 4 balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls pattern is not displayed in the number of reserved balls display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of ball entries into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is configured to be suspended up to four times in total. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved number of balls display area Db, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four is displayed for the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second pattern display device 83 performs a variable display by alternately lighting up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. be. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric accessory provided at the second start port 64b is displayed for a predetermined time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the number of reservations is displayed according to the number of the second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment. A part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, instead of turning on the second symbol reserve lamp 84, the variable display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Also, the passage through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the second starting port 64b, but is 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). can be set to Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

A first starting port 64a is provided below the variable display unit 80, and a second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a. The first starting port 64a is provided with an opening into which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting port 64a is always open, allowing the ball to enter. When the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first starting port switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the first starting port switch 208a. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and the third pattern display device 81 displays the variation of the third pattern. executed. The first starting hole 64a is also one of the winning holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The electric accessory opens and closes the two blades to open the second starting port 64b (enlarged state) or close it (reduced state). Normally, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the wings of the electric accessory are closed (the wings stand up), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b. It is in a difficult state.

Then, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined period of time. From the state in which the wings of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is being operated. It will be in a substantially V-shaped (inverted V-shaped) movable state, and the second starting port 64b will be in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or a ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, the ball is entered into the second starting port 64b when it stops at the symbol "○" and wins, and the second starting port 64b is opened. Then, a state can be created in which many big winning lotteries can be performed.

When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second starting port switch 208b. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and the third pattern display device 81 displays the variation of the third pattern. executed. The second starting hole 64b is also one of the winning holes from which two balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided below the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular large prize winning port (also called a large opening or specific prize winning port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 becomes a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win stops after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the normally closed big winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds).

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the big winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The big winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the large winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

When a ball enters the big winning slot 65a, a big winning slot switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the big winning slot switch 208e is turned on is counted. , the number of winning balls in the big winning opening 65a is counted, and the conditions for closing the big winning opening 65a are determined. Also, 12 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the turn-on of the big winning hole switch 208e. By repeating the open state and the closed state of the big prize winning port 65a due to the big hit, many balls are likely to enter the big winning prize port 65a, and the player can appreciate the game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A specific winning opening and a large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big win is lit on the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times with the entry of a ball into the specific winning port as a special game state may be formed as a special game state.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which the ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 turns on the second symbol ( Ordinary design) hit lottery will be held.

As a result of the lottery of the second pattern (normal pattern) performed for the ball that passed through the through gate 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the second pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 and then " After the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated. As a result, the wings of the electric accessory, which make it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, move from a substantially vertically upright state to a substantially V shape (inverted V shape), and the ball moves for a predetermined time. can be entered into the second starting port 64b, or a state in which the ball can enter more easily than in the closed state.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Also, the balls that enter the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through a switch for detecting the entry of the ball provided for each winning opening. be. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided ball, and is then discharged to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. .

Here, a ball shot into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters one of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66.例文帳に追加Therefore, the balls entering the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out-opening 66 are guided to the ball discharge path and always pass through the out-switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls shot into the game area (the number of balls used in the game) can be grasped. Also, the out switch 208f detects a ball that has actually passed through the game area and entered one of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. In other words, a ball that was shot into the game area but got caught somewhere in the game area and was not used in the game as a result is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to prevent the balls not used in the game from being counted as the balls shot into the game area.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control board is also provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the game machine, such as the ratio of accessories, can be connected. The inspection terminal 207a is normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a, and only the inspection terminal 207a may be exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the game performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as the accessory ratio.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated.

The main control unit 110 controls the main operations of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of a jackpot lottery, variable display (variable effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process. The main processing of this pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processings.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. Then, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large winning opening solenoid for opening and closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

Also, the input/output port 205 has a group of switches and a group of sensors including various switches for detecting a ball that has entered each winning hole and a ball guided to the ball discharge path through each winning hole and out hole. etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

The main controller 110 is provided with a role ratio management chip that manages information about the ratio of the pachinko machine 10 . The character ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via a signal line 206, receives information necessary for managing the character ratio from the MPU 201, and processes and stores the received information to control the role of the pachinko machine 10. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information on material ratios.

An inspection terminal 207 a is connected to the role product ratio management chip 207 . The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the game machine, such as the ratio of the characters and the like. Information on the role product ratio managed by the role product ratio management chip 207 and information on other inspections are transmitted to the inspection device 300 . The inspection device 300 can determine whether or not the character product ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is within the normal range based on the information regarding the character product ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

Here, a detailed configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of main controller 110. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the input/output port 205 is connected to the RAM erase switch 253 on the input side, and has the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the payout on the output side. In addition to connecting the control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208 connected on the input side include a first starting port switch 208a for detecting a ball that has entered the first starting port 64a, a second starting port switch 208a, and a second starting port switch 208a. A second starting opening switch 208b for detecting a ball that has won the opening 64b, a first normal winning opening switch 208c for detecting a winning ball in the first normal winning opening 63a, and a second normal winning opening 63b. A second normal winning hole switch 208d for detecting a ball, a big winning hole switch 208e for detecting a ball that has won the big winning hole 65a, a ball that has won each of the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, and An out switch 208f that detects a ball that has entered the out port 66 and is guided to the ball discharge path, and detects that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 13 has been locked and opened. A door open switch 208g is connected.

The input port 205 includes the first port 205a to which the output of the first starting switch 208a is input, the first port 205b to which the output of the second starting switch 208b is input, and the output of the first normal winning opening switch 208c. General 1 port 205c to which is input, General 2 port 205d to which the output of the second normal winning slot switch 208d is input, Big winning slot port 205e to which the output of the big winning slot switch 208e is input, Out switch 208f and a door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected.

The MPU 201 executes switch read processing (see FIG. 11) for checking the states of various switches in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first 1 port 205a, the first 2 port 205b, the general 1 port 205c, the general 2 port 205d, the big winning port 205e and the out port 205f, and and the presence or absence of balls guided to the ball discharge path, the number of winning balls in each winning opening and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds (i.e., number of balls fired into the playing area). Then, the number of each ball counted and the game state at that time (whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, whether there is an error state, etc.) are displayed. It is set in the character product ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The role product management chip 207 calculates and manages the role product ratio based on the number of balls. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. The main controller 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 by various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables 202a to 203d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. Also, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used for managing the character ratio in the character ratio management chip 207, and when the power of the main controller 110 is turned on, the character ratio It is sent to the management chip 207 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are mainly used to set the jackpot lottery, the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83. It is used in MPU 201 of control device 110 . In the description of various counters, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the number counter used for selecting the jackpot symbol are used. A per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the first per random number counter C1 are used. .

Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 17). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 64b.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899). It is configured to return to When the first winning random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 17).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball wins either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b ( At the timing of starting winning), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 at that time is the first winning random number counter storage area of one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 203b1. The value of the random number for the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that will be a big hit, it will be determined as a big hit.

Details of the jackpot random number table 202a will now be described with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. A jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability state used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period in which the probability is not variable), and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot from the low probability state. It is divided into two types, one for high probability state used in the case of high probability state (during probability change) with high probability. The number of random numbers to be the big wins included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 899. FIG. In the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big win in the low probability state is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the big winning random number table 202a. ing.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big hit in the case of a high probability state is 30, and the values are 28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322 , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers for the low-probability state and the jackpot random numbers for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are not duplicated. have set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be illegally awarded. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball starts either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the value of the first winning type counter C2 at that time is the first winning random number counter C1 among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 of the same reservation area as the reservation area to be stored.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes an outlier, the variation pattern in the variation effect Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a big hit, the variation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation performance will be those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM202. Here, with reference to FIG.8(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.8(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types and the values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and 100 There is a "15R normal jackpot" that is a time-saving state during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds hits two rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8(b), the value of the first per type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot, and the value of the first per type counter C2 "40 to 39" is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79” is associated, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 “80 to 99” is associated with the 2R probability variable jackpot.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value for a big win, the big winning type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area is determined from the big winning type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first win type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the jackpot type table defines the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type.

In addition, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

Moreover, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the starting hole into which the ball is entered. That is, as the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a jackpot when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, For example, the "15R variable variable jackpot" is 40%, the "15R normal jackpot" is 40%, and the "2R variable variable jackpot" is 20%. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number that becomes a jackpot, for example, "15R variable jackpot" is 55%, "15R normal jackpot" is 40%, and "2R variable jackpot" is selected. ” may be 5%.

In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first start port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second start port 64b are prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the first hit type associated with each jackpot type The number of values of the counter C2 may be changed. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, the values of the various counters stored in each area are the winning prizes for either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. A flag indicating whether it is stored together is also stored, and based on the flag, the jackpot type is used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area. A table may be selected. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided in a form corresponding to each of the first to fourth reserved areas, and the values of various counters stored in the corresponding areas are determined by the flags of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. The jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type based on the first win type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag indicating which start port is stored with the winning prize. A table may be selected.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. There are three stops: "Reach out of front and back" that stops at the same time, "Reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs, and "Complete out of reach" that does not occur ( production) pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first hit random number counter C1 among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same reservation area as the reservation area.

The ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random numbers for selecting the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, the stop pattern table 202c with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is selected so that the ready-to-win effect is not selected unnecessarily because the jackpot is likely to occur. This makes it easier for people to choose “completely out”. In this stop pattern table 202c, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-rear reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-rear reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-rear reach". Become.

In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is set to 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. , the narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, making it difficult to select "completely off". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, and "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is more likely to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b can be secured, and the variation by the third symbol display device 81 Display can be easily continued. In the latter stop pattern table 202c as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). Also, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the same reservation area as the reservation area in which the first hit random number counter C1 is stored among the reserved first to fourth areas.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, when the MPU 201 performs a variation effect based on the various counters stored in one reservation area, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the reservation area and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ROM 202 The variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table 202d. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

Details of the variation pattern table 202d will now be described with reference to FIGS. 8(c) to 8(e). The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the variation pattern table 202d, a big win variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of the big win, and loss variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of the loss. In addition, as the deviation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, depending on whether the game state is a high probability state at the time of the time saving state or the probability change, or a low probability state at the normal time excluding the time saving state, for the loss (probability change) A fluctuation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

Further, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is respectively a table referred to when the number of held balls is 0 (that is, when there is no held ball), a table referred to when the number of held balls is 1, A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 4 are separately provided.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls as in the present embodiment. may be provided. For example, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be divided into a table that is referenced when the number of held balls is less than 3 and a table that is referenced when the number of held balls is 3 or more. . Further, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different in each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3. For example, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table to be referred to when the number of retained balls is less than 3 and a table to be referred to when the number of retained balls is 3 or more. A different table 202d2 may be prepared for each number of held balls, and a single table may be prepared for the variation pattern table 202d3 for loss (probability variation) regardless of the number of held balls.

FIG. 8(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 that is referenced when the number of held balls is 2, among the big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

The big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the big-hit type regardless of the number of held balls. Specifically, as a jackpot type, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common that is referred to when a 15R variable jackpot and a 15R normal jackpot is determined, and a dedicated 2R variable jackpot that is referred to when a 2R variable jackpot is determined. there is A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value (big winning random value) that becomes a big hit, the variation pattern according to the big winning type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area. Determines the group (group) to be referred to in the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. In the group (group) of the big win variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In common with the 15R jackpot, three variation patterns, a variation A with a variation time of 30 seconds, a variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and a variation C with a variation time of 90 seconds, are selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The variation A is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach with a short variation time. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 performs a so-called super reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach. Super reach includes, for example, reach that develops from normal reach, and long reach that has a long reach time. The variation C is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called special reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the super reach. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that develops further after the super reach, and a special reach that develops from the normal reach different from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8(c), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of pending balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for variation A, variation 11 to 99 for B, and 100 to 198 for variation C. Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is selected, it is easy to select the variation C in which the special reach is executed in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It's becoming However, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any reach by structuring such that variation A in which normal reach is performed and variation B in which super reach is performed are also selected.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a large number of different effects are prepared for each reach. The image displayed on the back side of the character) is rapidly changed and displayed, and a certain character is suddenly displayed. Includes multiple reach with different production contents, such as those with is added. In the main control unit 110, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, only the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are determined as fluctuation patterns, and the sound ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 control each fluctuation A to A detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. According to the detailed variation pattern, the third symbol display device 91 executes a variation effect.

Only the "2R fluctuation" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 59 seconds is selectably prepared exclusively for the 2R probability variable jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, regardless of the number of pending balls, in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( 0 to 198) are associated with 2R variations. That is, when the jackpot variation type is the 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

When the 2R variation is selected by the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation is determined by the sound ramp controller 113 and the display controller 114. FIG. Therefore, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in the main controller 110, the third symbol display device 81 executes a fluctuation effect according to a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation. In the pachinko machine 10, characters such as "chicken" or "girl" are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81 as detailed variation patterns corresponding to the 2R variation, and finally A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, and a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a particular symbol with the lighting or blinking of a particular lamp are included.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another variation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a big hit or a ready-to-win effect before the start of the change or during the change effect, or if the reach is established, the last It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the third symbol to be stopped is to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted before and after, etc.).

Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in the pachinko machine 10, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, only the "2R variation" variation pattern is selected. Without providing a group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 may define only the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved. In this case, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R fluctuation may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only "2R variation" is selected when a 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved, but one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns when a 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved. You may do so. In this case, like the group common to the 15R jackpot, even in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected when the 2R probability variable jackpot occurs, and a certain reservation area The variation pattern associated with the stored value of the variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area.

FIG. 8D schematically shows an example of a failure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 that is referenced when the number of held balls is 2, out of the failure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 8(d), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is dedicated to complete deviation, which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and forward-backward deviation reach and forward-backward deviation. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of loss, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. is attached.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is not a value for a big win (random value for a big win), that is, when it is a value that becomes an outlier, the game state is normal except for the time-saving state. When in the low probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserve area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area as the first hit random number counter C1. A variation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

Two variation patterns, a variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, are selectable for the complete outlier, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. are mapped. When the variation D or the variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol variation device 81 executes a variation performance of stopping and displaying without reaching reach after the high speed variation of the third symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 8(d), in the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each variation dedicated to complete loss and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of held balls is 2 is as follows: 0 to 98, and the variation E is 99 to 198.

In addition, in common to reach, there are three variations A to C described above, that is, variation A in which normal reach is executed by the third symbol variation device 81 with a variation time of 30 seconds, and super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds. Three variation patterns of variation B executed by the 3-symbol display device 81 and variation C executed by the 3-symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable. In the outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each variation common to the reach when the number of held balls is 2 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A and 99 to 190 for variation B. , the variation C is 191-198.

FIG. 8(e) schematically shows an example of the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 that is referenced when the number of balls held is 2, out of the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation in the same manner as the deviation (normal) variation pattern table. Fluctuation D and variation E can be selected as a variation pattern only for complete deviation, and when the reach other than front and rear deviation reach and front and rear deviation is determined, the variation A to C can be selected as a variation pattern Reach common, It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of deviation, and in the divided groups, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each selectable fluctuation pattern.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is a value that does not result in a big win, that is, a value that is out of the game, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the time of probability variation, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern. Determined from table 202d3.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), in the loss (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the correspondence between each variation exclusively for complete loss when the number of held balls is 2 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is as follows: 0 to 190, and the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, when the number of held balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. In other words, the correspondence between each variation common to reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same between the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation, the ball is likely to enter the second start port 64b, and the complete deviation (variation E) with a long variation time is often executed. If so, it takes a long time to start the next variable display, and the player may be put in a waiting state and feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is not preferable for the hall because the operating rate is lowered.

Therefore, if the game state is completely out when it is in a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability variation, it is a complete outage with a shorter fluctuation time than when it is in another game state (normal state except for time-saving state) ( In order to facilitate the selection of variation D), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured. As a result, by starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility of making the player feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

Although the variation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting whether or not to display an advance notice, etc.). In addition, the selection of the type of loss is configured to be divided into a (normal) variation pattern table for loss and a (probability variation) variation pattern table for loss, but even if the game state is normal, there are multiple held balls (for example , 3 or more if the maximum is 4), since the variation display may be ended early, the selection may be made by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table.

In addition, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the front-rear out-of-reach reach or the front-rear out-of-rear reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the game state, Normal) The fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include a group common to reach, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely off. In addition, a variation pattern table may be separately prepared which is referred to when the stop type is either the front-rear out-of-order reach or the non-rear-out-of-rear reach regardless of the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the out-of-order reach or the non-out-of-order reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although it is assumed that there is, it may be different depending on the game state.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8(d) and 8(e), the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply set as "complete deviation fluctuation", and the "complete deviation fluctuation" is selected. In this case, another table may be referenced to select variation D and variation E with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of held balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, the second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right through gate 67. There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that a winning is occurring, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a "○" symbol as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10). It is updated and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 17).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of (fluctuation effect) and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The prize ball number table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins a prize) in each of the prize winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a. Details of the number-of-balls table 202e will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-balls table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the number-of-balls table 202e, the "starting opening type" includes the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. is defined, and for each winning hole, the "number of prize balls" corresponding to that winning hole is defined. Specifically, in the number of prize balls table 202e, the number of prize balls is associated with the first start opening 64a, the number of prize balls is associated with the second start opening 64a, and the number of prize balls is associated with the second start opening 64a. 8 prize balls are associated with the opening 63a, 8 prize balls are associated with the second normal winning opening 63b, and 12 prize balls are associated with the big winning opening 65a.

The prize ball number table 202e defines the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole for all the winning holes provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with winning holes other than the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning holes is included in the number of prize balls table 202e. is defined.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same between the first normal winning hole 63a and the second normal winning hole 63b. Therefore, in the number-of-balls table 202e, the first normal winning hole 63a and the second normal winning hole 63b are combined, and the "starting hole type" is defined as "normal winning hole", and is associated with the "normal winning hole". The number of prize balls may be defined as 8. Also, if the number of prize balls of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b is the same as "3", in the number of prize balls table 202e, the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b are combined. , the "starting opening type" may be defined as "starting opening", and the number of prize balls 3 may be defined in association with the "starting opening".

The number-of-balls table 202e is transmitted to the role-ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the main controller 110 is powered on, and Used when calculating ratios.

The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio in the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG. Although the details will be described later, the role product ratio management chip 207 calculates the role product ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

The role product ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (trigger) as the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio. The first is the number of shot balls, and the role ratio management chip 207 calculates the role ratio each time the number of shot balls reaches a predetermined number. The second is the time, and the role product ratio management chip 207 calculates the role product ratio when a predetermined time comes. The third is the playing time, and the role product ratio management chip 207 calculates the role product ratio when the player's playing time has passed for a predetermined period of time.

In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating any one of “number of shots”, “time”, and “game time” is defined as the calculation timing (trigger) of the role product ratio in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the character ratio when the information indicating the "number of shots" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", the character ratio A role product ratio is calculated in the management chip 207 .

When information indicating "time" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as "predetermined times", the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the character product ratio is calculated in the character product ratio management chip 207 .

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio, when the information indicating the "game time" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "game time" and information indicating two hours as the "predetermined time", the role ratio management chip 207 , the role product ratio is calculated.

The trigger information data 202f is sent to the character ratio management chip 207 together with the prize ball number table 202e during the initialization process of the MPU 201 that is executed when the main controller 110 is powered on. It is used when the management chip 207 determines a trigger for calculating the character product ratio.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

A power failure signal SG1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is shut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter). With this input, power-off occurrence information is set by the executed NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15). In the main processing of the MPU 201 (FIG. 17), when it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information, the stack pointer at that time and the values of each register are stored in the RAM 203 .

On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on.

The RAM 203 further includes a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a start 1 counter 203d, a start 2 counter 203e, a general 1 counter 203f, a general 2 counter 203g, a big winning opening counter 203h, an out It has at least a counter 203i.

The number of retained balls counter 203a is one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b detected in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the entering ball (starting winning), the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) is counted up to 4 times. It is a counter that Zero is set as an initial value of the reserved ball number counter 203a by the initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the number of pending balls counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

The value of the pending ball number counter 203a (that is, the pending ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the pending ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The pending ball count command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the pending ball counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of pending balls of the variable effect that is held by the main controller 110 by the number of pending balls command. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the suspension count of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, every time a start winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball number command from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp control device 113, the pending ball number of the variable effect managed by the voice ramp control device 113 is reduced to noise. Even if the number of reserved balls of the actual variable performance reserved by the main controller 110 is deviated due to such influences, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display pending ball number command for notifying the pending ball number to the display control device 114 every time the internally managed pending ball number changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, in the pending ball number command, not only the value of the pending ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 , the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the pending ball number counter 203a. C3, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a starting prize, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 , is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 by the number of pending pitches command.

In the voice ramp control device 113, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command is changed based on each value. Pre-reading is performed before performance is executed, and what kind of variable performance will be (whether or not a big hit will occur, how variable time will be, etc.) is determined before execution of the variable performance. Execution of various effects can be determined based on the result of judgment by the look-ahead.

The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning. A memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), each counter from the counter buffer The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b is divided into four reserved areas (first reserved to first 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the big winning lottery and the setting of the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the above-described reserved ball storage area 203b (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one starting prize is stored in this reserved ball execution area 203c. shift to It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. used by

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are used. A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the stop type at the time of loss, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball enters either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (start winning). Store each value.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) has a first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter C2 that stores the value. A per type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in one of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning) is stored. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Similar to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the reserved ball execution area 203c stores a first winning random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the value of the first winning type counter C2. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in this reserved ball. It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 17), and a big winning lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. . Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the random value in the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the first reservation area is transferred to the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reservation ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first winning type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , the random number in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4.

When the shift of the data to the holding ball execution area 203c is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b stores (holds). Shift processing is performed to shift the data to areas (first to third) whose area number is 1 smaller. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the pending ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the area Shift to area (1st to 3rd) with number 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Further, for example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second pending area to the first pending area. , to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. can reduce the control burden.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (retained) in the reserving areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. A start 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the first start opening 64a, a start 2 counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the second start opening 64b, and a general 1 counter 203f. is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a, a general 2 counter 203g is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b, and a large winning opening counter 203h is a large winning opening counter 203h. The out counter 203i, which is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the winning opening 65a, is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). be. All of these counters 203d to 203i are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting processing (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after power-on.

In addition, the MPU 201 performs the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) which is executed every 2 milliseconds. Referring to the port 205c, the normal 2 port 205d, the large winning opening port 205e and the out port 205f, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c and the second normal winning opening switch 208d. , the big winning opening switch 208f and the out switch 208g determine whether or not the ball has been detected. Then, when there is a winning in any of the winning openings (the ball is detected in the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning opening is incremented by 1, and the ball is detected in the out switch 208g. is detected, the out counter 203i is incremented by one.

The counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information, together with the information indicating the game state at that time, to the role product ratio management chip 207. be done. When the setting of the values of the respective counters 203d to 203i to the character product ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and the prizes are won again in the winning slots for the next 0.5 seconds. The number of balls drawn is counted for each winning hole, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. The number (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the role product ratio management chip 207 . As will be described later, the role product ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing of calculating the role product ratio. Until the timing to calculate the product ratio, or from the previous calculation of the role ratio to the next timing to calculate the role ratio, the number of balls that won each prize hole Also, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

In this way, the number of winning balls into the winning opening actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the role ratio management chip 207. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of balls recognized as prize-winning.

In addition, if the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning hole and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If the character ratio management chip 207 does not perform these calculations and only the character ratio management chip 207 is used, the winning to each prize opening and the ball discharge route are guided at short intervals (for example, 2 millisecond intervals) even with the character ratio management chip. The ball must be monitored, which increases the processing load and may increase power consumption.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting results of the MPU 201 are set in the character ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. In addition, between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the character ratio is calculated for the first time, or between the time when the character ratio was calculated last time and the time when the next character ratio is calculated. A process of counting the number of winning balls in each winning hole and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning hole, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, the winning of each winning hole and the ball guided to the ball discharge path are monitored. It is necessary to perform such control, and processing is originally performed at intervals as short as 2 milliseconds. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, since the interval at which the balls are shot into the game area by the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is approximately 0.6 seconds, The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) are 0 or 1 in most cases, and a few balls at most. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, this counting process can suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 . Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole for 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). (number of

The character product ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first read/write memory 263, a second read/write memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") 266. , which are connected to each other via bus 206 . The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and inspection terminals 207a.

Also, a large-capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the role product ratio management chip 207 . While power is being supplied to the main controller 110, the capacitor 267 is charged. The power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to perform processing associated with the power-off. Note that a chargeable/dischargeable secondary battery may be connected to the character product ratio management chip 207 instead of the capacitor 267 .

The CPU 261 is an arithmetic device that controls the operation of the role ratio management chip 207, and executes a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the role ratio management chip 207 to control the role in the pachinko machine 10. The material ratio management chip 207 is used to manage the material ratio. Since the CPU 261 manages the role product ratios in the role product ratio management chip 207 and the like, it is possible to flexibly cope with the function change and specification change of the role product ratio management chip 207 by changing the software.

RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 incorporates a rechargeable secondary battery (not shown), and using the secondary battery as a power source, the RTC 266 keeps track of the current time and outputs the current time. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is "time", and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is set in the trigger setting area. 265b, the process of calculating the character product ratio is executed. In addition, although the details will be described later, for the first reading 263, the jackpot data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the out-of-time data 263k are the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, or the time When external information is added, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each data together with each piece of information.

The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various types of information set by the MPU 201, and is composed of an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data. The buffer 262 is provided with at least a first 1 buffer 262a, a first 2 buffer 262b, a general 1 buffer 262c, a general 2 buffer 262d, a big winning opening buffer 262f, a buffer during jackpot 262g, a buffer during opening 262h, a buffer during error 262i, and the like. ing.

The value of the first counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the first buffer 262a. The value of the start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the start 2 buffer 262b. The general 1 buffer 262c stores the value of the general 1 counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The value of the general 2 counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the general 2 buffer 262d. The value of the big winning opening counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the big winning opening buffer 262e. The out buffer 262f stores the value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds.

When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is during the jackpot, the information (jackpot information) is stored in the buffer during jackpot 262g. When the game state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open, the open buffer 262h stores the information (door open information). If the game state set by the MPU 201 is in error at intervals of 0.5 seconds, the error buffer 262i stores the information (error information).

In the character product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 performs setting (writing) to various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and when an interrupt signal is received from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 performs setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. reference). The setting information reception process counts the number of winning balls for each winning hole based on various information set in the buffer 262, and the balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls shot to the game area). are counted, and the number of balls is stored in the first read/write memory 263, and information on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first read/write memory 263.

The setting register 265 is a register for setting a setting value necessary for the operation of the role product ratio management chip 207 . The setting register 265 is provided with at least a number-of-balls data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

A winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a. The trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the trigger setting area 265b. When the main controller 110 is powered on, the ball prize table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are sent to the character ratio management chip 207. FIG. Then, the CPU 261 sets the number-of-balls table 202e in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

The prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 275a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the role ratio. Here, the number of prize balls for each winning hole is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is stored in the ROM 202 conventionally. Information on the number of prize balls is transmitted from the number of prize balls table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the role ratio management chip 207 each time power is supplied, and the number of prize balls data setting area of the prize ratio management chip 207 is displayed. 265a, there is no need to store information on the number of prize balls that differs for each model in the ROM of the character ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Also, if the pachinko machine model is different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio can be calculated accurately.

The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether or not the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f has come. When it is determined, the process of calculating the role product ratio is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the character ratio management chip 207 is determined by the character ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the character ratio management chip 207 that can record the information on the character ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability, probability variation rate, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 are taken into consideration. As in the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the character ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability, probability variation ratio, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. Each time the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 to the role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio management chip 207 can execute a role product at a timing that matches the jackpot probability, probability variable ratio, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the continuous character product ratio and record it in the second read/write memory 264 .

Note that only the winning ball table 202e and the trigger information data 202f, which are transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on, are the winning ball number data. It is configured to be set in a setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b. The startup process is a so-called boot process, which is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false winning ball table or trigger information data in the winning ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

The first read/write memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing while accumulating the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until the timing for calculating the character product ratio. The first read/write memory 263 is composed of a data readable/writable volatile memory such as an SRAM. Note that the first read/write memory 263 may be configured with a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing a larger amount of data.

In the first reading memory 263, there are a start 1 counter 263a, a start 2 counter 263b, a general 1 counter 263d, a general 2 counter 263e, a big winning opening counter 263e, an out counter 263f, a jackpot data 263g, an opening data 263h, and an error. At least data 263i and after-hours data 263j are stored. These counters and data stored in the first read/write memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on the initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( See S710 in FIG. 18).

In addition, these counters and data stored in the first read/write memory 263 are referred to by the role product ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when the timing for calculating the role product ratio has come, and necessary processing is performed. After that, the CPU 261 initializes all to 0 again (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, in the first read/write memory 263, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is accumulated and temporarily stored again until the next timing for calculating the character product ratio. .

The start 1 counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first start opening 64a before the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 1 counter 203d indicating the number of balls that have won the first start hole 64a for 0.5 seconds in the start 1 buffer 262a, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a. (That is, the number of balls winning the first starting hole 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a.

The start 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second start port 64b until the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls that have won the first start hole 64a for 0.5 seconds in the start 2 buffer 262b, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b. (That is, the number of balls winning the second starting hole 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first 2 counter 263b.

The normal 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first normal prize winning opening 63a before the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the general 1 counter 203f, which indicates the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds, in the general 1 buffer 262c, the CPU 261 sets the general 1 buffer 262c. A value (that is, the number of balls winning in the first normal winning hole 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 1 counter 263c.

The normal 2 counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b until the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the general 2 counter 203g that indicates the number of balls that have won the second normal prize winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds in the general 2 buffer 262d, the CPU 261 sets the general 2 buffer 262d. A value (that is, the number of balls winning in the second normal winning hole 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263d.

The big winning hole counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls winning the big winning hole 65a until the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the big winning hole counter 203h, which indicates the number of balls that have won the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds, in the big winning hole buffer 262e, the CPU 261 sets the value in the big winning hole buffer 262e. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won in the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning hole counter 263e.

The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls shot to the game area) until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the out buffer 262f to the value of the out counter 203i that indicates the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds, the CPU 261 resets the value set in the out buffer 262f (that is, 0 .5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the character ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is "number of shots", this out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls (number of shots) indicated by the out counter 263f is counted in the trigger setting area. When the "predetermined number of balls" set in 265b is exceeded, the CPU 261 executes the process of calculating the role product ratio.

When the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big win before the timing of calculating the role product ratio, the big win data 263g is the big win information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has won a big win. It is the data specified together. When the MPU 201 sets the jackpot information indicating that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state in the jackpot buffer 262g, the CPU 261 sets the jackpot information together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. It is added to the medium data 263g.

The open data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 opens the door when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) is open before the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. This is the data defined together with the time when the door is open, which indicates that the state has been reached. When the MPU 201 sets door open information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open as the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the open buffer 262h, the CPU 261 displays the door open information. is added to open data 263h along with the current time indicated by RTC 266.

The in-error data 263g provides in-error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes in error before the timing of calculating the role product ratio. This data is specified together with the time of When the error buffer 262i is set by the MPU 201 to the error buffer 262i, the error information indicating that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in error is set by the CPU 261 together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. , is added to the in-error data 263i.

The after-hours data 263j is set (written) to the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 in the pachinko machine 10 when the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed in a late-night time period (for example, between midnight and 6:00 in the morning), which is usually outside business hours. This data defines after-hours information indicating that some kind of action was performed in the middle of the night, together with the time at that time. When the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed by the MPU 201, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266 by the CPU 262, and when it is determined that the time is in the midnight time zone, the after-hours information is Together with the current time indicated by RTC 266, it is added to after hours data 263j.

The second read/write memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, such as a flash memory, from which data can be read and written. The second read/write memory 264 only needs to hold stored data even while the power is turned off. (MRAM: Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory), resistance change type memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random Access Memory)
Access Memory) or the like. In addition, while the second read/write memory 264 is composed of a DRAM, by continuing to supply the backup voltage from the power supply device 115 to the DRAM even while the power is off, data can be retained even while the power is off. You may make it

The second read/write memory 264 stores at least character material ratio data 264a, continuous character material ratio data 264b, shot ball number data 264c, and game information data 264d.

The role product ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the role product ratio calculated for each timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous role product ratio data 264b is data in which data representing the continuous role product ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) is recorded together with the calculated time.

Here, the role ratio is the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player, which is paid out according to the winning of the second starting hole 64a and the big winning hole 65a in which the role is activated. It shows the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls), and is defined as 70% or less. In addition, the continuous role ratio is defined as the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in association with winning in the big winning hole 65a in which the role is continuously operated, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It shows the ratio of the number of balls), and is defined as 60% or less.

Originally, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio refer to the above ratios in the case where the game ball trial shooting test is performed for 10 hours, but here, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area For each timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the CPU 261, the CPU 261 controls the timing until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on, or between the previous timing and the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the second starting hole 64a and the big winning hole 65a out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out is calculated, It is recorded in the role product ratio data 264a together with the time of day. Also, the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the mouth 65a is calculated and recorded in the continuous role ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to pay out from the timing (trigger) of calculating the most recent role product ratio until it is determined that the power is cut off. Based on the number of balls won (prize balls), the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be obtained without omission even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. A ratio can be calculated.

The number of balls that have won the first starting hole 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls that have won the second starting hole 64b indicated by the first counter 263b, The number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a indicated by the 1 counter 263c, the number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b indicated by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the large winning opening counter 263e indicated by the big winning opening counter 263e. The number of prize balls associated with each prize hole shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a for each of the number of balls that have won the prize hole 65a. By multiplying by , the number of balls paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening can be calculated for each winning opening. By totaling these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

As a result, the number of balls paid out with winning to the second start hole 64b and the number of balls paid out with winning to the big winning hole 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player By calculating the total ratio with the number of , the role ratio can be calculated. Further, by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out with winning to the big winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated.

The shot ball number data 264c is the total number of balls shot to the game area counted by the out-counter 263f of the first reading memory 263, for each timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio, and the time at that timing. Data recorded together. The total number of balls shot to the game area from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time or from the previous timing to the current timing is indicated by the out counter 263f. When the timing for calculating the character ratio has come, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the shot ball number data 264c together with the time at that time indicated by the RTC 266.

The game state data 264d includes jackpot information, door opening information, error information, and overtime information stored in the first reading memory 263 during jackpot data 263g, during opening data 263h, during error data 263i, and during overtime data 263j. are recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When it is time to calculate the role product ratio, the jackpot information, the door opening information, and the jackpot information stored in the first reading memory 263 during jackpot data 263g, during opening data 263h, during error data 263i, and after hours data 263j, The CPU 261 records the in-error information, the out-of-hours information, and the time associated with each information in the game state data 264d.

At this time, for example, if the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the game state is that the jackpot is continuously occurring, so the jackpot at the earliest time. Only the information and its time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, for the door open information, error information, and overtime information, if each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and the time is recorded in the game state data 264d. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

When recording jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information in the game state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) each piece of information from the oldest time information, and transfers the information to the game state data 264d. Record. When outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the recorded order. As a result, each piece of information is output in chronological order from the oldest, so that the inspection device 300 can easily analyze changes in the game state with the lapse of time by analyzing the information in the order in which it is output.

However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to arrange each piece of information in order from the oldest piece of information and store it in the gaming state data 264d. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read out the information recorded in the game state data 264d in order from the oldest time and transmit it to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, each piece of information may be output to the inspection device 300 in the order in which it was recorded, and the inspection device 300 may rearrange the pieces of received information from the oldest one.

The jackpot information, door opening information, error information and after-hours information stored in the first reading memory 263 during jackpot data 263g, during opening data 263h, during error data 263i and after-hours data 263j are respectively corresponded. All of them may be recorded in the game state data 264d together with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d is large, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, it is possible to analyze the operating state of the pachinko machine 10 while observing minute changes in the game state.

Here, the information on the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls shot into the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c are each stored in a predetermined number ( For example, 1024). In addition, the total number of jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (eg, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the role ratio data 264a, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the shot ball number data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the newest information is replaced. is recorded. For example, the role ratio data 264a, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the shot ball number data 264c, and the game state data 264d are configured like ring buffers, respectively, and the positions where information is written on each ring buffer are managed. A memory is separately prepared in the second read/write memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second read/write memory 264, and by shifting the writing position by 1 each time information is written, the oldest information can be obtained. can be erased and the latest information can be recorded there. By setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each piece of data in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264 . Also, when the number of information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can be analyzed including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. can be done. By preparing a memory in the second read/write memory 264 for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer, even if the power supply is cut off in the middle, the data can be restored after the power supply is turned on. New information can be added and recorded from the continuation of the information stored up to.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 controls the character product ratio data 264a and the continuous character product ratio data 264b recorded in the second read/write memory 264, The number of balls memory 264c and the game state data 264d are transmitted to the inspection device 300 in order. When transmitting each data 264a to 264d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 transmits each information recorded in each data 264a to 264d (including recorded time information associated with each information). They are read in order and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . Just by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs, and processing for transmitting each information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is executed. can be completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 analyzes the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and fraud can be quickly and easily detected from the character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Send to device 300 . On the other hand, if the data for transmitting information to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of information that can be recorded (predetermined number above), the memory that manages the position to write the information indicates. The position indicated in the memory that manages the position to write the information by shifting the reading position by 1 in order from the position next to the position (i.e., the position where the oldest time information is recorded) (i.e., the position where the information is written) , the position where the latest time information is recorded) are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, the information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Since the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, even if the power supply is turned off in the middle, the second reading memory 264 records the information regarding the character ratio etc. in the pachinko machine 10. continue to be Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze information regarding the character product ratio and the like including information before the power is turned off.

Here, some of the fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big prize by increasing the number of prizes to be won. Also, there are those who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize winning opening 65a by some method or guiding the balls to the big winning prize opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio will increase.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the role ratio management chip 207, and the prize ratio management chip 207 obtains the winning information for each winning hole from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. , the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio in the pachinko machine 10 are calculated at predetermined timings and recorded continuously. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a , the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300 . As a result, by analyzing the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio in the inspection device 300, if a fraudulent act has been performed, the fraudulent act can be discovered.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 , information on the number of balls shot into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 and output to the check matching device 300 . Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are high, the cause is investigated based on the information on the number of balls shot into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 and housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202 and the like. As a result, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to alter the winning information or the like input to the role product ratio management chip 207 . It is also difficult to falsify or delete the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio recorded in the character product ratio management chip 207 . Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio calculated and output by the character product ratio management chip 207 .

In addition, the character object ratio management chip 207 is provided with a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264. Based on the number of winning balls for each winning hole counted in , the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . Here, the second read/write memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, but in general, non-volatile memory requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time to write, and is not durable from the viewpoint of durability. There is a limit on the number of writes. In this embodiment, the first reading memory 263 composed of a volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 composed of a non-volatile memory are separated. By performing the processing of counting and storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening at high speed, it is possible to count the winning balls in each winning opening without fail. Then, later, from the number of winning balls for each winning hole stored in the first reading memory 263, the process of calculating the role ratio and the continuous role ratio and recording them in the second reading memory 264 is performed at a predetermined timing ( Trigger), the number of times of writing to the second read/write memory 264 can be reduced, thereby suppressing the above-mentioned problems caused by the non-volatile memory.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 at intervals of about 0.6 seconds.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the effect mode of the hour.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the performance mode of super ready-to-win, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third pattern display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

The RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed, and indicates that a variable effect should be started in the ON state. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 25) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and various screen displays such as variable display of the third symbol (fluctuation effect) and big win effect at the time of the big win are controlled by a sound lamp. It controls according to the command transmitted from the control device 113 (main control device 111).

The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113 , and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231 , the ROM 232 , the work RAM 233 and the image controller 236 . A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236 , and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238 . Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and other various commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores performance data (character information) such as patterns (background pattern and third pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 has an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of character information read out from the character ROM 235 in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a decompressed format, and a plurality of decompressed data. A memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing one frame of display data generated using at least part of character information until the data is displayed.

The image controller 236 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to display the third data. It is displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In timer interrupt processing and main processing, based on various processing, commands to be transmitted to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, etc. are generated and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 12). In addition, it transmits to the sound ramp controller 113 the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation process (see FIG. 13) and the variation start process (FIG. 14) which is one process of the variation process. In addition, a ball launch signal set for shooting a ball in the process of S111, which will be described later, is transmitted to the launch control device 112. FIG.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the large winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the jackpot state. A large-opening opening/closing process for opening the door is executed (S103). That is, the big winning hole 65a is opened for each round of the big winning state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the big winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the big winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of the passage, and the second pattern display device 83 changes the second pattern. Display is performed. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. (899, 99, 99, 198, and 250 respectively in this embodiment) are cleared to 0 respectively. Also, when the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 or the second random number counter CINI2. The initial value of the second winning random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set to the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first start port 64a. And the starting prize-winning process associated with the winning to any one of the second starting ports 64b is executed (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and the details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the starting prize-winning process, the firing control process is executed (S111), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . When the ball shooting is on, the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Further, the other processing (S112) includes processing for determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, in spite of the information of the ball launch signal being set in the process of S111, the ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball launched to the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or longer. If not, it is determined that there is a possibility of ball clogging and an error state exists. Also, when the abnormal payout signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the ball payout is in an error state. Furthermore, when it is determined that a large vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10 or a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is fraudulent and that the game is in an error state. .

It should be noted that whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to a large vibration is determined by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a vibration sensor that senses vibration, and inputting the output of the vibration sensor to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 201. This is done by reading the output of the vibration sensor in the process of S112. In addition, whether or not a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10 is determined by providing a magnetism sensor for detecting changes in the magnetism in the pachinko machine 10 and inputting the output of the magnetism sensor to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 201. This is done by reading the output of the magnetic sensing sensor in the process of S112.

In the processing of S112, if it is determined that an error state exists, an error command including information on the error type is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. FIG. As a result, an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 112 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the voice output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be lit and blinked, and an image corresponding to the error type can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. .

Next, the switch reading process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing this switch reading process (S106).

In the switch reading process, first, the first start switch 208a, the second start switch 208b, the first normal winning switch 208c, the second normal winning switch 208d, the big winning switch 208f, and the out switch 208g. The output is read by referring to the first 1 port 205a, the first 2 port 205b, the general 1 port 205c, the general 2 port 205d, the big winning port 205e and the out port 205f of the input/output port 205, and the first starting port 64a, Detected information ( Winning detection information) is saved (S151). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharge path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the respective switches 208a to 208f.

Next, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a prize has been won by the processing of S151 among the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the second winning port 65a. If there is a determined winning hole, the number of won balls is adjusted so that the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole (that is, the number defined by the prize ball number table 202e) is paid out. A prize ball command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Then, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a prize has been won by the processing of S151 among the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the second winning port 65a. If there is a determined winning opening, the counter corresponding to the winning opening is set to 1 among the first 1 counter 203d, first 2 counter 203e, general 1 counter 203f, general 2 counter 203g, and big winning opening counter 203h. While counting up, if it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, the out counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S153).

Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the winning information (the values of the counters 203d to 203i and information on the game state of the pachinko machine 10) was set to the role product ratio management chip 207 last time ( S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds have not passed (S154: No), the switch reading process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), the processing of S155 to S157 is executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, and the big winning opening counter 203h are used as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is used as out information. (S155).

As a result, the value of the start 1 counter 203d is set in the start 1 buffer 262a of the role product ratio management chip 207, the value of the start 2 counter 203e is set in the start 2 buffer 262b of the role product ratio management chip 207, and the general 1 counter is set. The value of 203f is set in the normal 1 buffer 262c of the prize ratio management chip 207, the value of the normal 2 counter 203g is set in the normal 1 buffer 262d of the prize ratio management chip 207, and the value of the big winning opening counter 203h is the role. The value of the out counter 203i is set in the out buffer 262f of the character ratio management chip 207.

In this way, the number of balls counted by the counters 203d to 203i continues for 0.5 seconds. is set in the character product ratio management chip 207 as out information together with information indicating the game state at that time. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the role product ratio management chip 207 . As will be described later, the role product ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing of calculating the role product ratio. Until the timing to calculate the product ratio, or from the previous calculation of the role ratio to the next timing to calculate the role ratio, the number of balls that won each prize hole Also, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

Suppose that the MPU 201 does not count the number of winning balls for each winning opening or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). , If these counts are performed only by the character ratio management chip 207, even with the character ratio management chip, the winning to each winning hole and the ball guided to the ball discharge path are performed at short intervals (for example, 2 millisecond intervals). must be monitored, which may increase the processing load and power consumption.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting results of the MPU 201 are set in the character ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. In addition, between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the character ratio is calculated for the first time, or between the time when the character ratio was calculated last time and the time when the next character ratio is calculated. A process of counting the number of winning balls in each winning hole and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning hole, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, at intervals of 2 milliseconds when the timer interrupt processing is executed, the winning of each winning hole and the balls guided to the ball discharge path are monitored. It is necessary for the main control of the game such as prize ball determination, and is originally processed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, since the interval at which the balls are shot into the game area by the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is approximately 0.6 seconds, The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) are 0 or 1 in most cases, and a few balls at most. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, this counting process can suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 . Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole for 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). (number of

The gaming state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, during a big win, during opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and during an error. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

Further, whether or not the game state is in error is based on the result determined by the process of S112 of the timer interrupt process. In the process of S155, when it is determined that the game is in an error state in the process of S112, information indicating that the game state is in error is set in the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG.

When the game state set by the processing of S155 includes the state of being a jackpot, the jackpot information is stored in the buffer 262g during the jackpot. When the middle buffer 262h stores door open information and the game state includes an error, the error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. These pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264 d of the second read/write memory 264 in the role product ratio management chip 207 . When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information regarding the game state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the information regarding the role product ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and finds an incomprehensible tendency in the character ratio, the inspection device 300 searches for the cause by referring to the information indicating the game state. can be done.

After the processing of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 (S156). Based on this interrupt signal, the character ratio management chip 207 executes setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, and based on the various information set in the buffer 262, are counted, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls fired to the game area) is counted, the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine Information about ten game states is also stored in the first read/write memory 263 .

After the process of S156, the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, the major prize winning opening counter 203h corresponding to each winning opening, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are set to 0. is initialized (S157), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the process of S157, the number of balls that win in each winning hole in the next 0.5 second is again counted by the counters 203d to 203h for each winning hole. Also, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out-counter 203i.

In the process of S154, when this process is executed for the first time after power is supplied to the main controller 110, the winning prize information (the values of the counters 203d to 203i and the pachinko machine 10 game state information) is set, it is assumed that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. As a result, the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning hole detected before the power is turned off and the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path are set in the character ratio management chip 207 when the power is turned off. The values of the respective counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203, which have not been set, can be set in the role product ratio management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied on condition that they are held even during the power failure. Therefore, in the role product ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress recording omission of winning information and out information due to power failure.

Next, the starting winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S110). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (start winning). A process of storing (holding) the value of CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

When the MPU 201 executes the starting winning process, first, it determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (starting winning) (S201). Here, by the processing of S151 of the switch reading process (see FIG. 11), the first start opening switch 208a that detects winning to the first starting opening 64a and the second starting switch 208a that detects winning to the second starting opening 64b The result of whether or not there is a winning to the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b, which is determined based on the output signal from the opening switch 208b, is utilized.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (there has been a starting prize) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls N of the variable effect that is present is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, if there is no winning in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a winning in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b If it is not the number N of operation pending balls N<4 (S202: No), the process returns to timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: Yes), and if the number of retained balls N<4 (S202: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (retained 1 is added to the number of balls (N) (S203). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 and Each is reserved (stored) in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first pending area. Also, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", each storage area in the second pending area, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", the third storage area If the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the storage areas of the fourth pending area.

Next, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S203 (the number of retained balls N), the first winning random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the retained ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, and the first winning In order to transmit the pending ball number command including the respective values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the pending ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it instructs the display control device 114 to display the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number N in the reserved ball number display area Db (see FIG. 4). do. In addition, the voice ramp control device 113 uses the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holds-balls command to read ahead before the variable effects based on the respective values are executed, and how the variable effects are executed. (Whether it will be a big hit or not, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before execution of the variable performance. Execution of various effects can be determined based on the result of judgment by the look-ahead.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the pending ball count command in the process of S205 may be the values read out from the counter buffer in the process of S204, or may be stored in the pending ball storage area in the process of S204. A value read out from the value stored (reserved) in 203b may be used.

After completing the process of S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Next, the variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing this variation process (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the jackpot is not in progress (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating. (S302: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: No), this process is terminated. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (variable display pending ball number N held in the main controller 110) is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable effect. The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S307) starts the execution of one of the suspended variable effects, so that the number of suspended balls is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, reserved second area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), returning to timer interrupt processing. Note that the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 .

In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after the demonstration command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is greater than 0 Identifies the interval as being in demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to timer interrupt processing. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the demonstration command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demonstration effect on the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable stop, the third symbol display device 81 displays the demonstration effect.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S310). The display time during fluctuation of the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, a display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S307), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big win is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306. Depending on the value of , after the jackpot, the pattern will be a 15R variable jackpot (a variable jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and then a high probability state after the jackpot) or a 2R variable jackpot (with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds after the jackpot and a high probability state). It is determined whether it is a pattern that will be a transitional variable jackpot) or a pattern that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variable jackpot is achieved after the jackpot, the blue LED is lit, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved, the red LED is illuminated, and when the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, the red LED and the blue LED are lit. , and the LED of . In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. Then, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 and to display the stop pattern. conduct.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S307), which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S307). In this fluctuation start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, a "jackpot" or "loss" lottery (jackpot lottery) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 And the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(a)). A lottery (win/fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big win is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state, "7,307,582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. Further, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are defined as jackpot random numbers.

In the processing of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. In that case, it is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(b) ), the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds after the jackpot. A 15R variable jackpot that shifts to a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds with the maximum number of rounds, or a 2R variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds with the maximum number of rounds. be discriminated. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot patterns corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) are set as they are as stop types. The display mode at the time of the big hit in the 3-symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display in the display mode at the time of the big win is determined. In determining the variation pattern for the big win, first, the big win variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8(c)) to be used is selected according to the number of pending balls at that time indicated by the pending ball number counter 203a. Then, in the process of S402, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "15R jackpot common" group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. That is, in this case, one of variation A, variation B, and variation C is selected.

In addition, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group "only for 2R probability variable jackpot" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In the present embodiment, only the 2R variation is selected in this case. Note that the relationship between the variation patterns (variation A, variation B, variation C, and 2R variation) and variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode when the win is out is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, the third As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, any one of front-rear out-of-reach reach, front-rear out-of-reach without reach, and complete out-of-order is set. In this embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high-probability state or the low-probability state, the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is Tables are set differently.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display of the lost symbol is determined. At this time, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state excluding the time-saving state, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the number of reserved balls counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 8(d)) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the time of probability variation, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 ( (see FIG. 8(e)) is selected.

Then, when complete deviation is set as the stop type in the processing of S404, the suspension A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation D or variation E is selected.

In addition, in the processing of S402, when front-rear out-of-reach reach and reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach are set as the stop type, "common reach" of the selected deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 group, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the processing of S406, based on the variation pattern determined by the processing of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Also, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 via the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the change processing. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. It is sent to the lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S614.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S706 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S615, S616).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S615, S616) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S610, an initialization signal is transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 (S610). Accordingly, upon receiving the initialization signal, the character object ratio management chip 207 executes initialization processing such as initializing all the buffer 262 and the first read/write memory 263 to 0 (S711 in FIG. 18), The character product ratio management chip 207a is initialized so that the character product ratio can be managed.

Next, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e is transmitted to the role-ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a in the character ratio management chip 207, and each prize when a prize is won in each prize opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, the character ratio and continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Here, the number of prize balls for each winning hole is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is stored in the ROM 202 conventionally. Information on the number of prize balls is transmitted from the number of prize balls table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the role ratio management chip 207 each time power is supplied, and the number of prize balls data setting area of the prize ratio management chip 207 is displayed. 265a, there is no need to store information on the number of prize balls that differs for each model in the ROM of the character ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the pachinko machine models are different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio can be calculated accurately.

Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 (S612). Thus, in the role ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b, and when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f comes, the pachinko machine 10 character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated.

Here, the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the character ratio management chip 207 is determined by the character ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the character ratio management chip 207 that can record the information on the character ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability, probability variation rate, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 are taken into consideration. As in the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the character ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability, probability variation ratio, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. Each time the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 to the role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio management chip 207 can execute a role product at a timing that matches the jackpot probability, probability variable ratio, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the continuous character product ratio and record it in the second read/write memory 264 .

After the processing of S612, the interrupt is permitted (S613). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S703) by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10), and the process proceeds to S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 10 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big win, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained first hit random number counter C1 depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. is different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly. . In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning random number counter C2 are updated using these as initial values for updating. can have randomness.

In the process of S701, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. , the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 15 has been executed, so the power-off process after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) In addition, power-off information is transmitted to the role-product ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished, and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, the occurrence information of the power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S701 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the timer interrupt processing is used to execute periodically executed processing, and the main processing updates the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was performed by the timer interrupt processing to read the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal read processing (S102), the large opening opening and closing processing (S103), the second symbol control processing (S105), and the switch reading. Part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22. FIG. The processing of the CPU 261 can be broadly divided into main processing for managing the ratio of characters and items, which is started when the power is turned on, and reception of setting information, which is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information is set by the MPU 201. processing, and inspection result output processing that is executed based on the fact that the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, the role product ratio management main processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing this role product ratio management main process. This role product ratio management main process is started when power is supplied to the role product ratio management chip 207 .

When the role product ratio management main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination of S710 is continued. Then, if it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711 to perform initialization (S711). As a result, in the character product ratio management chip 207, at least the initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 is completed, and the initialization of the character product ratio management chip 207 is executed after waiting for the stage where the game control by the MPU 201 can be started. will do.

In the initial setting of S711, when starting the operation of the character product ratio management chip 207, each device in the character product ratio management chip 207 is initialized. For example, the buffer 262 and the first read/write memory 263 are all initialized to zero. As a result, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, meaningless data can be prevented from remaining in the buffer, and the meaningless data can be prevented from remaining in the buffer. Storage in the memory 263 can be prevented. Also, in the first read/write memory 263, the number of balls that have won a prize in each prize-winning slot and guidance to the ball discharge path are displayed from when the power is supplied to the role-ratio management chip 207 to when the timing for calculating the role-ratio is reached. The number of balls hit (that is, the number of balls shot into the game area) can be accumulated and counted, and information about the game state during that time can be stored.

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the number-of-balls table 202e has been received from the MPU 201 (S712). And while it is not received (S712:No), the process of S712 is continued and performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (S712: Yes), the received ball number table 202e is set in the ball number data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a in the character ratio management chip 207, and each prize when a prize is won in each prize opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, the character ratio and continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Next, it is determined whether or not information on the trigger setting data 202f has been received from the MPU 201 (S714). And while it is not received (S714:No), the process of S714 is continued and performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger setting data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. As a result, in the role ratio management chip 207, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, the ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and the A continuous role ratio is calculated.

In this way, only the prize ball table 202e and the trigger information data 202f, which are transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on, It is configured to be set in a number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false winning ball table or trigger information data in the winning ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, when an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 after winning information is set is received, the setting information reception process is executed, and an interrupt signal is generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a. An interrupt signal causes inspection result output processing to be executed.

When the interrupt signal is input at the same time, the setting information reception process is executed with priority over the inspection result output process. As a result, the latest winning information, out information, and information about the game state input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the role ratio management chip 207, and information such as the role ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, analysis by the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed including the latest information. On the other hand, when interrupt signals are input at the same time, inspection result output processing may be executed with priority over inspection apparatus output processing. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, it is possible to transmit the information regarding the role item ratio and the like to the inspection device 300. FIG.

Next, it is determined whether power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717), and S717 is continuously executed unless power-off information is received (S717: No). Further, during this time, when the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the setting information reception process is executed prior to the process of S717, and an interrupt generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a is executed. When the input signal is received, inspection result output processing is executed.

As a result of the process of S717, when the power interruption information is received (S717: Yes), the power supply to the main controller 110 (character product ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to power failure or the like. Therefore, the role product ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Details of the role product ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 .

Next, setting information reception processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing this setting information reception process. This setting information receiving process is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201 .

The setting information reception process includes the winning information set in each buffer 262a to 262e by the MPU 201 (each value of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, and the big winning opening counter 203h) and This is a process of storing in the first reading memory 263 the out information (value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the gaming state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i. In addition, when it is time to calculate the role ratio, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are calculated based on the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263, and the number of shot balls and the data related to the game state are calculated. At the same time, a process of recording in the second storage memory 264 is also performed.

First, refer to FIG. In the setting information reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720). If the opening buffer 262h contains door opening information (S720: Yes), the opening data 263h is set (added and stored) together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 ( S721).

If it is determined by the process of S720 that there is no door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the process of S721, then whether or not there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722). If there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723). .

If it is determined by the process of S722 that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the process of S723, then the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is the midnight time zone (midnight 0 to 6:00 in the morning) (S724). Since the late-night hours are usually outside business hours, the fact that an interrupt signal was transmitted from the MPU 201 during the late-night hours and the setting information reception process was executed means that some kind of fraudulent act occurred during the late-night hours. It is also considered to have been taken. Therefore, when it is determined that it is the late-night time zone by the processing of S724 (S724: Yes), the out-of-hours information is added to the out-of-hours data 264j at the current time indicated by the RTC 266 in order to record that effect. It is set (added and stored) together with the time (S725).

When it is determined that it is not the midnight time zone by the process of S724 (S724: No), and after the process of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is big win information in the buffer 262g during the big win (S726). If there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (additionally stored) in the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

When it is determined that there is no jackpot information in the buffer 262g during the jackpot by the processing of S726 (S726: No), and after the processing of S727, the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to the winning openings and the out switch 208f are set. The values obtained are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first read/write memory 263 (S728).

Specifically, the value set in the first buffer 262a corresponding to the first starting hole 64a (that is, the number of balls winning the first starting hole 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls entering the first starting port 64a is accumulated in the first counter 263a. The value set in the start 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second start port 64b (that is, the number of balls winning the second start port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b is accumulated in the first 2 counter 263b.

The value set in the general 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first normal winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the general 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning hole 63a is accumulated in the normal 1 counter 263a. The value set in the normal 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second normal winning opening 63b (that is, the number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning hole 63b is accumulated in the normal 2 counter 263b. The value set in the big winning hole buffer 262e corresponding to the big winning hole 65a (that is, the number of balls winning the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning hole counter 263e. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole 65a is accumulated in the big winning hole counter 263e.

Counters 263a to 264f and data 263g to 264j of the first read/write memory 263 store the initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the role ratio management chip 207 and the role ratio. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, which is executed when the timing for calculation comes. As a result, in the first read/write memory 263, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is accumulated and temporarily stored again until the next timing for calculating the character product ratio. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the description of the setting information winning process will be continued. After the process of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the "number of shots" (S729: "number of shots"), the value of the out counter 263f (that is, the game It is determined whether or not the number of balls shot into the area) is greater than or equal to the "predetermined number of balls" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). When the value of the out-counter 263f is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the role ratio is reached, and the role ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , S734. Details of the role product ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 . On the other hand, if the value of the out-counter 263f is not equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio by the number of shot balls, it is possible to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio when a predetermined ball is always shot. Therefore, since it is possible to calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio at the stage where many balls enter various winning slots and the prize balls are played, the averaged role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated. can. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in a short period of time in a normal game, so that the inspection device 300 can more easily analyze cheating.

In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "time" (S729: "time"), the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is , whether or not the "predetermined time" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, being reached includes not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 matches the "predetermined time" but also the case where the "predetermined time" has passed for the first time.

If it is determined by the process of S731 that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the "predetermined time" (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the character ratio. Then, the role product ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, if the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio according to the current time, the role ratio is reliably calculated by the arrival of the predetermined time even under the condition that the pachinko machine 10 does not play many games. And the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to reliably analyze whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the reliably calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio.

In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "game time" (S729: "game time"), the player at the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether or not the cumulative time (game time) during which the game has been played has reached or exceeded the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

Here, the game time can be calculated, for example, by the following method. That is, a game time counter is provided in the first read/write memory 263 . The game time counter, like the other counters and data stored in the first read/write memory 263, is the general 2 initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the character ratio management chip 207. ) and S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, when it is time to calculate the character ratio. Then, in the setting information receiving process, the value of the out buffer 262f is checked, and when a value of 1 or more is set, the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, the ball is in the game area. Since it means that it has been fired, the game time counter is incremented by one. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the game time counter.

When it is determined that the game time has reached the "predetermined time" or more by the process of S732 (S732: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the role ratio is reached, and the role ratio calculation process is executed. (S733), the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, if the game time is less than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are originally calculated by performing a trial shooting test of game balls for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio according to the playing time, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio that are close to the original definition can be calculated by the role ratio management chip. Analysis can be performed using the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio that are close to the original definitions.

In the process of S734, the buffer 262 is initialized to all 0 (S734). As a result, even if there are buffers that are not set for the buffers 262a to 262i in the next setting of winning information, out information and game information from the MPU 201, it is possible to prevent meaningless data from remaining in the buffers. It is possible to prevent the meaningless data from being stored in the first read/write memory 263 . After the process of S734, the setting information reception process is terminated.

Next, the role product ratio calculation processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this role product ratio calculation process. The character ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording it in the second reading memory 264. The timing of calculating the character ratio ( trigger) (see FIG. 20), and also when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18).

In the role product ratio calculation process, first, the role product ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 262, and the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is added to the role product ratio data 264a. (S740). Next, the continuous role product ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first read/write memory 262, and is added to the continuous role product ratio data 264b and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741). ).

The role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls that have won the first starting hole 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, and the number of balls that have won the second starting hole 64b indicated by the first counter 263b. , the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a indicated by the normal 1 counter 263c, the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b indicated by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the number of winning balls indicated by the big winning opening counter 263e. The number of balls that have won in the big winning hole 65a is shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. By multiplying the number of balls, the number of balls paid out for each winning hole is calculated as a result of winning the winning hole. Then, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated.

The total number of balls paid out to the player is divided into the number of balls paid out with winning in the second starting hole 64b and the number of balls paid out with winning in the big winning hole 65a. By calculating the ratio of the number and the total, the role ratio is calculated. Further, the continuous accessory ratio is calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out accompanying the winning to the big winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

Originally, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio refer to the above ratios in the case where the test shooting test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but in this embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b For each timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio shown in 202f, the player receives a signal from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out as a result of winning in the second starting hole 64a and the big winning hole 65a out of the total number of balls (prize balls) put out is calculated as the role ratio. is recorded in the role product ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. Also, the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous role ratio, and recorded in the continuous role ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to pay out from the timing (trigger) of calculating the most recent role product ratio until it is determined that the power is cut off. Based on the number of balls won (prize balls), the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be obtained without omission even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. A ratio can be calculated.

Next, the value of the out-counter 263f indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area is added to the shot ball number data 264c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S742). Furthermore, various jackpot information, door open information, error information, and overtime information stored in the jackpot data 263g, opening data 263h, error data 263i, and overtime data 263j are associated with each piece of information. The time (the time when the information was stored) is arranged (sorted) in order from the oldest time information, and added to the game state data 264d and recorded (S743).

In the process of S743, for example, if the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the jackpot is continuously occurring as the game state, so the oldest time Only the jackpot information and its time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, for the door open information, error information, and overtime information, if each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and the time is recorded in the game state data 264d. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

As described above, when the character ratio management chip 207 receives the winning information, the out information, and the information about the game state from the MPU 201, the first reading memory 263 accumulates and temporarily stores these information, Each time the timing (trigger) for calculating the character product ratio is reached, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the second reading memory 264. Record. This makes it possible to manage the role product ratio and the like with a small storage capacity and to transmit information on the role product ratio and the like to the inspection device 300 .

In addition, the second reading memory 264 also stores the times when they were recorded in the second reading memory 264 with respect to the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. Further, in the second reading memory 264, not only the character ratio and the consecutive character ratio, but also information indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area is recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. In addition, information related to the game state (jackpot information, door open information, error information, out-of-time information) is recorded in the second reading memory together with the time when each information was stored in the first reading memory 263. H.264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300, if there is a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the changed character ratio or the continuous character ratio By analyzing the total number of balls shot into the game area and the game state around the time recorded in the second reading memory 264, the cause of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio can be investigated.

Here, the information on the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls shot into the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c are each stored in a predetermined number ( For example, 1024). In addition, the total number of hit information, door open information, error information, and overtime information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (eg, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the role ratio data 264a, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the shot ball number data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the newest information is replaced. is recorded.

Specifically, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the ball number data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured in a ring buffer, and a memory for managing the position where information is written on each ring buffer is prepared. By shifting the writing position by 1 each time information is written, it is possible to erase the oldest information and record the newest information there.

By setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each piece of data in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264 . Also, when the number of information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can be analyzed including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. can be done.

After the processing of S743, the first read/write memory 263 is initialized to all 0 (S744). As a result, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored while accumulating until the next timing for calculating the role item ratio is reached by the first read/write memory 263. .

When the process of S744 ends, the role product ratio calculation process ends.

Next, inspection result output processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this inspection result output process. This inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, data in the second read/write memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 .

When the inspection result output process is executed, first, all the character product ratios recorded in the character product ratio data 264a and the character product ratios associated with each character product ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The recorded time is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the character product ratio with the oldest recording time (S751).

Specifically, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the role product ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 first writes the information of the role product ratio to the role product ratio data 264a. From the position where the information is written, the information on the character ratio recorded to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information on the character ratio at the latest time is recorded) They are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the role product ratio data 264a, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, The position where the information on the role product ratio at the oldest time is recorded) is shifted by 1 in order, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the role of the latest time) The information recorded up to the position where the information on the product ratio was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, the information of the character product ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Next, all the continuous role product ratios recorded in the continuous role product ratio data 264b and the times when the continuous role product ratios were recorded in the second reading memory 264, which are associated with the respective continuous role product ratios, are recorded. , and output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest recorded time (S752).

Specifically, when the continuous role product ratio data 264b does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded, the CPU 261 first stores the continuous role product ratio information in the continuous role product ratio data 264b. is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the latest continuous role ratio information is recorded). Information on the product ratio is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the continuous role product ratio data 264b, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e. , the position where the information of the continuous role product ratio at the oldest time is recorded), the position where the information is written is shifted by 1 in order, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the latest time) The information recorded until the position where the information of the continuous role product ratio is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information of the continuous role product ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Next, the information on the number of balls (the number of shot balls) shot to all the game areas recorded in the shot ball number data 264c, and the information on the number of shot balls associated with the information on the number of shot balls are displayed as the second. 2. The time recorded in the reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the character product ratio with the oldest recording time (S753).

Specifically, when the number of shot balls data 264c does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded, the CPU 261 first writes information on the number of shot balls to the number of shot ball data 264c. The information on the number of shot balls recorded from the position where the information is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the latest time is recorded) They are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the shot ball number data 264c, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information (that is, The position where information on the number of balls fired at the oldest time is recorded) is shifted by 1 in order, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the latest time of firing) The information recorded up to the position where the information on the number of balls was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the information on the number of shot balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Next, all the jackpot information, door open information, error information, and overtime information recorded in the game state data 264d, and the time when the information associated with each information was stored in the first reading memory 263 are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S754).

Specifically, if the game state data 264d does not meet the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded, the CPU 261 starts recording the information from the position where the information was first written in the game state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory managing the writing position (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the game state data 264d, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the most The position indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information by shifting the read position by 1 in order from the position where the information of the old time is recorded (that is, the position where the information of the latest time is recorded) ) are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As described above, in the game state data 264d, each piece of information about the game state is arranged (sorted) from the oldest time information and recorded in the game state data 264d. Therefore, the information about the game state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

By the processing of S751 to S754, each piece of information is output in order from the oldest one, so the inspection device 300 analyzes each piece of information in the order in which it is output, so that the role item ratio, It is possible to easily analyze changes in the continuous role ratio, the number of shot balls, and the game state.

After the process of S754, the test result output process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control unit 110 is provided with the role ratio management chip 207, the prize information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the role ratio management chip 207 calculates the ratio ratio and the continuous ratio ratio. to record. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a , the information on the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 .

Here, some of the fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big prize by increasing the number of prizes to be won. Also, there are those who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize winning opening 65a by some method or guiding the balls to the big winning prize opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the inspection device 300 analyzes the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, so that if a fraudulent act has been performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. can be found.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 , information on the number of balls shot into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 and output to the check matching device 300 . Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are high, the cause is investigated based on the information on the number of balls shot into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 and housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202 and the like. As a result, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to alter the winning information or the like input to the role product ratio management chip 207 . Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio calculated and output by the character product ratio management chip 207 .

In addition, since the MPU 201 is not made to manage the role ratio and the like, but the dedicated role ratio management chip 207 for managing the role ratio and the like is provided, an increase in the processing load on the MPU 201 can be suppressed, and the game can be played as the main part of the game. The MPU 201 can be devoted to such control.

Also, the character ratio management chip 207 is provided with a prize ball number data setting area 265a, and when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. Then, the character ratio management chip 207 calculates the character ratio and the continuous character ratio using the prize ball number data 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. As a result, there is no need to store information on the number of prize balls that differs for each model in the ROM of the role product ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Also, if the pachinko machine model is different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio can be calculated accurately.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 23, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S915 (see FIG. 24) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), it executes power-off processing in S915. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S915 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S802: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S915. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written by the process of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), it will transfer to S804 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S915 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S804, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S915 is executed, the reason why the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S809) in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), an interrupt Permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), skipping S809, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, proceeds to S810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), and sets interrupt permission. Then (S811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S809 is skipped is that when the process of S808 is reached from S804 via the process of S806, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was executed last time (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S901: No) , S902 to S908 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S910. In the processing of S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S902 to S908 do not need to be processed in a short period (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variable display processing of S910 is performed. This is because the command determination processing in step S911 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S911 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S910 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was last executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds directly to S902.

In the processing of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variable effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the back image of the display control device 114 is changed. Set command. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S905 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S905) ends, the lamp editing processing is executed (S906), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S907, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time. After the process of S908, the process proceeds to S910.

In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Executes variable display processing, which is processing set for transmission. The details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S911). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off processing is executed (S915). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S911). This command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process, first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. (S1001). Then, when it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later, a variation pattern command for display is issued to the display control device 114 to notify the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern. Used when setting.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the variable effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command when starting the variable effect. This command is always sent from 110 . By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON by the process of S1005, in the fluctuation display process executed later, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the previously received fluctuation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command , generate a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types, and execute processing for transmitting them to the display control device 114 .

As a result of the process of S1003, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the pending ball number command (that is, the suspended variable effect is suspended) number of balls) is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp controller 113 (S1007).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins (start winning) in either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b. Each time, the value of the number of pending balls stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the number of pending balls counter 203a of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1007. Therefore, even if the value of the number of pending balls of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the number of pending balls counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the pending ball of the voice ramp control device 113 is The value of the number counter 223 a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Next, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball number command are extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. It is what was done. The sound ramp control device 113 can perform prefetch processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223 . That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, Execution of various effects can be determined.

Next, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the pending ball number stored in the RAM 223 by the processing of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S902) of the main processing. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process to display the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third symbol display device 81 .

As a result of the process of S1006, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1006: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the reception of the confirmation command is set to the display control device 114 (S1011), and the process returns to the main process. . The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving the confirmation command for display, the variable effect being executed by the third pattern display device 81 is stopped, and the stop type corresponding to the stop type command for display is previously indicated. By displaying the stop pattern, it is determined and displayed.

As a result of the process of S1010, if it is determined that the definite command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1012), it shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 . The demonstration command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demonstration command by the processing of S1013, and after being temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, the command output processing of the main processing (S902) is performed. ) to the display controller 114 .

Next, the variable display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this variable display process (S910).

This variable display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variable effect. In order to do so, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. It is a process to

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, is off) (S1101: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation display process is executed. End and return to main processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and the fluctuation pattern command extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25) A variation pattern in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The variation pattern extracted here is the variation time. In the audio ramp control device 113, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation is selected from the plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). A pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 113 is set (S1104).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the detailed variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. , start the display control of the variable effect.

Next, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1105 is to be displayed. do.

Next, the number of held balls in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 as the held balls are consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the held balls is set) according to the setting of the display variation pattern command. (S1107), a display pending ball count command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated pending ball count value is set (S1108). Then, it returns to the main processing.

The display reserved ball number command set by the processing of S1108 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. be. The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 236. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a flow chart showing this main process. The main process is started when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

When the power is turned on and the main processing is executed by the MPU 231, first, the initialization processing is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and stored in an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 where the decompressed character information is stored. Write the extracted character information in the prepared frame buffer area. In addition, other necessary settings for initialization are performed.

When the initial setting process is completed, the interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(c), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27(c) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. and instructs the image controller 236 to display.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 236 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 27(c), first, a command determination process (S1602) is executed. In this command determination process (S1602), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. and start controlling the display.

When the stop type command for display is stored, during high speed fluctuation ( While the variable display of the third pattern is performed so that the content of the third pattern cannot be recognized by the player), the third pattern being displayed is replaced. When the confirmation command for display is stored, image drawing and display are controlled so that the confirmation display is performed in the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, in this command determination process (S1602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode of the variable performance and other effects selected by the main controller 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to obtain a performance image corresponding to the mode. is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the drawing of the image can be controlled.

After the command determination process (S1602) ends, display setting process (S1603) is executed. In the display setting process (S1603), based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602), etc., one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is selected. specifically identify the content of the image.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, task processing is executed (S1064). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1603), characters (sprites, display objects) forming the image are selected. Along with specifying the type, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite).

Then, drawing processing is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined in the task process (S1503), are transmitted to the image controller 236. FIG. As a result, the image controller 236 executes image drawing processing in accordance with these pieces of information, and displays an image drawn in accordance with the information received 1V before on the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. Control is performed to transmit the image data to the third pattern display device 81 .

After that, after executing other necessary processing, for example, processing for updating various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main control unit 110 is provided with the role ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the role ratio management chip 207 Calculate and record the product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a , the information on the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio recorded in the character product ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 .

Here, some of the fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big prize by increasing the number of prizes to be won. Also, there are those who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize winning opening 65a by some method or guiding the balls to the big winning prize opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the inspection device 300 analyzes the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, so that when a fraudulent act has been performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. can be found.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 , information on the number of balls shot into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 and output to the check matching device 300 . Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are high, the cause is investigated based on the information on the number of balls shot into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the role product ratio, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263. is calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b occurs, each recorded in the first reading memory 263 The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 as they are, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second read/write memory 264 are output to the inspection device 300 as they are.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the second embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in that the second read/write memory of the character material ratio management chip 207 stores the character material ratio data 264a of the first embodiment and the continuous The point is that winning counter data 264e is recorded instead of the role product ratio data 264b.

Also, in the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates the trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 in the second read/write memory 264. FIG. Note that the meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that of the first embodiment, and the content itself is the same as that of the first embodiment.

That is, in the trigger information data 202f, the values of the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 as triggers (timings) for "number of shots", "time", " Information indicating either "game time" is defined.

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the character ratio when the information indicating the "number of shots" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", the first reading is performed each time the number of shot balls reaches 500. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second read/write memory 264. FIG.

When information indicating "time" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as "predetermined times", the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 are recorded in the second read/write memory 264.

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio, when the information indicating the "game time" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "game time" and information indicating two hours as the "predetermined time", the first read/write memory 263 , are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 .

Winning counter data 264e is generated by first counter 263a of first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) for recording the values of counters 263a to 263e stored in first reading memory 263 in second reading memory 264. The total number of balls that won the first starting port 64a counted, the total number of balls that won the second starting port 64b counted by the first 2 counter 263b, and the first normal counted by the general 1 counter 263c The total number of balls winning the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b counted by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the winning number of the big winning opening 65a counted by the big winning opening counter 263e. It is data recorded together with the total number of balls played and the time at the recording timing.

Counters 263a to 263e corresponding to each winning opening indicate the total number of balls won in each winning opening during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. is indicated by When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 in the second read/write memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. is recorded in the winning counter data 264e together with the time of .

The prize winning counter data 264e are associated with one time, and are the total number of balls winning the first starting hole 64a, the total number of balls winning the second starting hole 64a, and the number of balls winning the first normal winning hole 63a at that time. It is also possible to record the total number of balls, the total number of balls winning the second normal prize winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls winning the big prize winning opening 65a.

Also, in the winning counter data 264e, an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second starting opening 64a, and an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first normal winning opening 63a. An area for recording the total number of balls won, an area for storing the total number of balls that have won the second normal prize opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have won the big prize opening 65a are provided, and a first reading memory is provided. When the timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in 263 in the second reading memory 264 comes, the total number of balls that have won in the corresponding winning opening for each area is calculated. The winning opening counter data 264e may be configured to be recorded together with the time in the timing.

Here, the information on the total number of balls that have entered each winning hole that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, in association with one time, the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a at that time, the total number of balls winning the second starting opening 64a, the total number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a, When the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b and the total number of winning balls winning the big winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of pieces of information are already recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If so, the oldest information will be deleted and the newest information will be recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e may be configured like a ring buffer, a memory may be separately prepared for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer, and the position where information is written may be shifted by 1 each time information is written. , the process of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized. Thus, by setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264. FIG. Also, when the number of information to be recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit, by erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information, the latest information including the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored in the inspection device 300. Analysis can be performed.

An area for recording the total number of balls that have won the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have won the second starting opening 64a, and the total number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a are recorded. , an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the big winning opening 65a. Alternatively, a ring buffer may be configured for each area, an upper limit may be set for the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each area, and control may be performed as described above. As a result, when the number of information to be recorded reaches the upper limit in each area, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded. Analysis can be done.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 reads the winning counter data 264e recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the shot ball number memory 264c, and the game state data. 264d are transmitted to the inspection device 300 in order. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 transmits each information recorded in each data 264e, 264c, 264d (including recorded time information associated with each information). , are read out in the recorded order and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 .

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Send to device 300 . On the other hand, when the data for transmitting information to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of information that can be recorded (predetermined number above), the memory that manages the position to write the information indicates. The position indicated in the memory that manages the position to write the information by shifting the reading position by 1 in order from the position next to the position (i.e., the position where the oldest time information is recorded) (i.e., the position where the information is written) , the position where the latest time information is recorded) are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, the information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

An area for recording the total number of balls that have won the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have won the second starting opening 64a, and the total number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a are recorded. , an area for storing the total number of balls that have won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have won in the big winning opening 65a. By reading the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls that have won the winning opening is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information for each winning opening. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, winning information saving processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this winning information saving process. In the first embodiment, the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio has come (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18) Although the character ratio calculation process of calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the second read/write memory 264 is executed (see FIG. 21), in the second embodiment, it is stored in the first read/write memory 263 When the timing (trigger) for recording each information received in the second reading memory 264 has come (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), instead of the character ratio calculation process, the winning Execute information saving processing. This winning information saving process is a process of recording each piece of information stored in the first reading/reading memory 263 in the second reading/reading memory 264 .

In the winning information storage process, first, the values of the counters 263a to 263e corresponding to the winning openings stored in the first reading memory 263 are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, and stored in the second reading memory 264. It is recorded in addition to the winning counter data 264e (S761). As a result, for each combination timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The total number of balls that won the first starting hole 64a counted by the starting 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting hole 64b counted by the starting 2 counter 263b The total number of winning balls, the total number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a counted by the general 1 counter 263c, and the number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b counted by the general 2 counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls that have entered the big winning opening 65a counted by the big winning opening counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. FIG.

In addition, even when the power is turned off, the electric power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to perform the recording from the most recent timing (trigger) of recording to the second read/write memory 264 until the power is turned off. Secondly, the total number of balls entering the first starting hole 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263, and the total number of balls entering the second starting hole 64b counted by the first second counter 263b. , the total number of balls that entered the first normal prize-winning opening 63a counted by the general 1 counter 263c, the total number of balls that entered the second normal prize-winning opening 63b counted by the general 2 counter 263d, and the big prize. The total number of balls winning the big winning opening 65a counted by the opening counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.例文帳に追加As a result, even with respect to the winning of each winning slot during the time when it is determined that the power supply is turned off from the timing (trigger) at which the most recent recording to the second reading memory 264 is performed, the winning of each winning slot is not omitted. The total number of balls played can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning hole.

In subsequent S742 to S744, the same processing (see FIG. 21) as S742 to S744 of the role product ratio calculation processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the winning information saving processing is terminated.

Next, inspection result output processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this inspection result output process. Similar to the first embodiment, this inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, data in the second read/write memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 .

When the inspection result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the number-of-balls table 202e set in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Next, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole recorded in the winning counter data 264e is recorded together with the time when the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264, which is associated with each information, and the recording time. are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 executed following the process of S772, the same processes as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output process of the first embodiment are executed, and the inspection result output process is finished.

The inspection device 300 calculates the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole output in S772 and the prize ball number table 202e output in S771. Then, the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio are analyzed. Then, when the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are high as a result of analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is sought based on information regarding the number of balls shot into the game area and information regarding the game state. be able to. In addition, by the processing of S772, the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole is output in chronological order from the oldest one. , changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio over time can be easily analyzed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, every time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b occurs in the role product ratio management chip 207, The values of the counters 263a to 263e that count the total number of winning balls for each winning hole stored in the first reading memory 263 are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning hole recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is stored in the winning ball number table 202e. are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the total number of balls that have won the respective winning holes is obtained for each of the winning holes and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 every time. Therefore, compared to the case where the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio calculated as in the first embodiment are recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the storage capacity required for the second read/write memory 264 is increased. Since the total number of winning balls for each winning hole is transmitted to the device 300, as a result of the analysis by the inspection device 300, if there is a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the inspection device 300 By referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning hole, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

In addition, the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning hole transmitted to the inspection device 300 is associated with the time when the information was recorded in the second read/write memory 264, and transmitted to the inspection device 300. be. Therefore, in the inspection device 300, as a result of analyzing the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls that have won in each winning hole, when there is a large change in the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio , specify the time when the total number of balls that won the winning openings used to calculate the changed role ratio or continuous role ratio was recorded in the second reading memory 264, and around that time, By analyzing the total number of balls that have entered each winning hole, the total number of balls that have been shot into the game area, or the game state, it is possible to find the cause of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a counter is provided in the first reading memory 263 to count the number of winning balls for each winning hole. , you may count the number of balls paid out by winning. Then, in the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the role ratio, based on the number of balls paid out for each winning opening counted by the first reading/reading memory 263, The product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated and accumulated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . Further, in the second embodiment, when the timing for calculating the character ratio has come, the winning for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263 is calculated when the timing for calculating the character ratio has come. The number of balls paid out by , may be accumulated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . In this case, when the number of winning balls for each winning opening is stored in the buffer 262 for 0.5 seconds, the CPU 261 responds to the number of winning balls for each winning opening. By multiplying the number of winning balls in the winning opening, the number of balls put out due to winning in the 0.5 seconds is calculated, and the calculated number of balls put out is stored in the correspondence provided in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the counter of the winning opening. Further, when it is detected that a prize has been won in one prize-winning slot, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the prize-winning slot in the buffer 262. When the information indicating the opening is written, the number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening is added to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, so that for each winning opening, The number of balls paid out by winning a prize may be counted. In addition, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds (or every predetermined time) and stores the number in the buffer 262. , when the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 calculates, for each winning hole, the number of balls paid out by winning the winning hole for 0.5 seconds written in the buffer 262 as the first By adding to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. When the MPU 201 detects that a prize has been won in one prize-winning slot, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out as a result of the prize-winning in the area corresponding to the prize-winning slot in the buffer 262. , in the CPU 261, when writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening storing the number of balls paid out is written to the buffer 262. By adding the number of balls, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning hole. In this way, even if the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 counts the number of balls paid out for each winning hole, the number of balls paid out for each winning hole thus counted is paid out. Since the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio can be calculated from the number of balls obtained, fraud can be detected by analyzing the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio. If the MPU 201 stores in the buffer 262 the number of balls paid out as a result of winning, the winning ball number table 202e does not have to be sent to the character ratio management chip 207, and the buffer 262 From the number of balls paid out by winning a prize for each winning hole stored in , the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated. In addition, in order to calculate the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio in the detection device 300, the number of balls paid out by winning, which is counted for each winning opening, may be transmitted to the detection device 300. . In this case, even if the detection device 300 does not transmit the contents of the number-of-balls table 202e to the detection device 300, the detection device 300 can calculate the contract ratio and the consecutive role ratio.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the role product ratio data 264a and the continuous role product ratio data 264b are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. It may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 , or only the continuous character object ratio data 264 b may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . can be The inspection device 300 can analyze fraud by analyzing the role product ratio or the continuous role product ratio transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207 .

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first read/write memory 263 is configured with a volatile memory has been described, but the first read/write memory 263 is configured with a nonvolatile memory (eg, flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, etc.). may be Also, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first read/write memory 263 even while the power is off. In this case, in the processing of S711 (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the character product ratio management chip 207, the initialization of the first read/write memory 263 may not be executed. As a result, the counters 263a to 263f and the data 263g to 263j stored in the first read/write memory 263 can be held even while the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power to the role product ratio management chip 207 is cut off, even if the role product ratio calculation process or winning information storage process is not executed, the most recent second reading memory 264 can be read before the power is cut off. Without omitting the winnings to each winning opening that occurred during the time when it was determined that the power was turned off from the timing (trigger) when the recording was performed to calculate the ratio of the winnings, etc., and the total number of winnings is calculated in the second reading. It can be recorded to memory 264 . Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be omitted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed and the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 is output. In addition, information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may also be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) to be recorded in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded in the second reading memory 264 It is information that is not used for calculation, or information that is not recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 to the inspection device 300, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to perform analysis using the latest information.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio calculated by the character material ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. However, by transmitting the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 to the inspection device 300 as well, although it is short-term information, the total number of balls that have won in each winning hole can be obtained. Raw information before calculating the ratio can be grasped by the inspection device 300 . Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, as information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio calculated by the character material ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. If the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300 , the winning balls table 202 e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 uses the winning ball number table 202e to calculate the latest role ratio and continuous role ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning hole transmitted from the first reading memory 263. and can be analyzed. It should be noted that the calculated role ratio and continuous role ratio are the values of winnings to each winning slot in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated character object ratio and continuous character object ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300. .

Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263, and the calculated role product ratio is calculated. The ratio and the continuous character ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . As a result, the inspection device 300 can easily analyze fraud by using the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio output from the character product ratio management chip 207 . In this case, the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may also be output to the inspection device 300 . This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis using information related to the latest winnings. Also in this case, the number-of-balls table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. FIG. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis while referring to the number-of-balls table 202e.

In each of the above embodiments, the character object ratio management chip 207 is provided with the first volatile reading memory 263 and the second nonvolatile reading memory 264, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first read/write memory 263 while accumulating until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached. Based on the information stored in 263, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 by the timing. The case of recording various information in the second read/write memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the character object ratio management chip 207, a non-volatile memory provided with at least a first reading area serving as the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area serving as the second reading memory 264. is provided, and until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading area while accumulating. , and when the timing comes, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading area based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area, or Various information accumulated and stored in the first reading area may be recorded in the second reading area until the timing is reached. As a result, the number of parts of the memory can be reduced, so an increase in the cost of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won a prize for each winning hole in 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. Then, the number of balls counted for each winning hole, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and information about the game state at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the character ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. Each time the setting is made in the buffer 262, the number of balls that have won in each winning hole set in the buffer 262, the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path, and the game state. The case where the information is accumulated and stored in the first read/write memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches. In this case, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and when the winning of the second start opening 64b is detected by the output of the second start opening switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, and the first normal winning opening switch 208c is turned on. When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d. The general 2 buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the out switch 208f guides the ball to the discharge path. When the ball is detected, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding jackpot buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, and error buffer 262i are turned on according to the game state at that time, and an interrupt signal is generated. It may be transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 . Then, in the character product ratio management chip 207, in the setting information receiving process executed in response to the interrupt signal, when the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, the start 1 counter 263a is incremented by 1, and the start 2 buffer 262b is When the general 1 buffer 262c is on, the general 1 counter 263c is incremented by 1, and when the general 2 buffer 262d is on, the general 2 counter 263b is incremented by 1. The counter 263d is incremented by 1, and when the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, the big winning opening counter 263e is incremented by 1, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, the out counter 263f is incremented by 1. When the big win buffer 262g is on, the jackpot information is additionally stored in the big win data 263g together with the time at that time, and when the open buffer 262h is on, the door is opened in the open data 263h. If the error buffer 262i is ON, the error information is additionally stored in the error data 263i together with the time at that time, and the setting If the time at which the information reception process is executed is midnight, the after-hours information may be added to the after-hours data 263j and stored together with the time at that time. As a result, the MPU 201 does not need to count the number of balls that have entered each winning hole or the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, so the processing load of the MPU 201 increases. can be suppressed. Therefore, most of the processing capacity of the MPU 201 can be allocated to the main control of the game that should be performed by the MPU 201 .

Also, in this case, the first start switch 208a, the second start switch 208b, the first normal winning switch 208c, the second normal winning switch 208d, the big winning switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are used for the role product ratio management. It may be input directly to the chip 207 . Then, in the role product ratio management chip 207, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. From each output, the presence or absence of winning to the first start port 64a, the second start port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, the big winning port 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path If there is a winning, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning starting port are incremented by 1, and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path. In this case, the out counter 263f may be configured to count up by one. As a result, when a prize is won in the prize winning opening or when a ball is guided to the ball discharge path, the situation can be immediately reflected in the role product ratio management chip 207 . In addition, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the role product ratio management chip 207, and the role product ratio management chip 207 determines whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened based on the output of the door release switch 208g. Then, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the door opening information is stored in addition to the opening data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. A management chip 207 may be configured. As a result, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of balls that have won a prize in each prize-winning opening until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached in the role ratio management chip 207 is set to the first Each counter 263a to 264e of the reading memory 263 counts, and the number of balls discharged to the ball discharging path until the timing (trigger) is reached is counted by the out-counter 263f of the first reading memory 263. In the first read/write memory 263, the first 1 buffer 262a, the 2nd buffer 262b, the 1st buffer 262c, the 2nd buffer 263c, and the big winning opening buffer 262e are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , out buffer 262d (i.e., the number of balls won in each winning hole during 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds) are It may be stored sequentially together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 . Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting rear 265b is reached, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated from the values stored in the first read/write memory 263. Calculate and record in the second read/write memory 264, or calculate the total number of balls that have entered each prize winning opening until the timing is reached, and the total number of balls that have been discharged to the ball discharge path before the timing is calculated. The total number of spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . By transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. can do. In this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the winning openings that have won during 0.5 seconds The number of balls per hour, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of balls (that is, the number of balls is stored in the first reading memory 263) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information such as how many balls have won in which prize opening at what time every 0.5 seconds, and how many balls have won at what time every 0.5 seconds. The inspecting device 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the ball was guided to the discharge path at the beginning (that is, whether the ball was shot to the game area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, as information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio calculated by the character material ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. If the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300 , the winning balls table 202 e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of balls winning each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263, and By using the number-of-balls table 202e, the latest role ratio and continuous role ratio can be calculated and analyzed. It should be noted that the calculated role ratio and continuous role ratio are the values of winnings to each winning slot in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated character object ratio and continuous character object ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300. .

In addition, the number of balls won in each winning hole in 0.5 seconds, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and their When storing the time associated with the number of balls (that is, the time when the number of balls was stored in first read/write memory 263), it is indicated by trigger information data 202f set in trigger setting area 265b. The information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 when the timing (trigger) is reached. In the inspection device 300, the number of balls won in each winning hole during 0.5 seconds recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the number of balls entering the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of balls are transmitted, and the winning ball number table 202e set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a is transmitted to the inspection device 300. can be As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls in each winning hole for each predetermined section from the number of balls winning in each winning hole every 0.5 seconds, and then calculates the number of winning balls in the winning ball table. 202e is used to calculate the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio for each predetermined section, and the possibility of fraud can be analyzed from changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the role product ratio suspected of cheating and the continuous role product ratio, the inspection device 300 stores the number of balls in each winning hole in 0.5 seconds and 0.5 seconds. Since detailed information related to the game, such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in five seconds and the time corresponding to the number of those balls, is inputted, based on this information, the role is determined. It is possible to finely investigate the cause of the change in the product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

In addition, without providing the first read/write memory 263, the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the general buffer 262c, the general buffer 263c, the large winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. 262d (i.e., the number of balls won in each winning hole during 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds) are indicated by RTC 266. It may be directly recorded in the second read/write memory 264 in sequence together with the time at that time. In this case, the game state information set in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds is also combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the game state of the second reading memory 264. It may be recorded in the data 264d, and if the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the late-night time zone, the after-hours information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the game state data 264d is recorded. may be recorded in the As a result, the first read/write memory 263 can be made unnecessary, so the cost increase of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

Further, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches, when the winning of the first start opening 64a is detected by the output of the first start opening switch 208a, Turns on the first 1 buffer 262a, and when the winning of the second starting opening 64b is detected by the output of the second starting opening switch 208b, turns on the first 2 buffer 262b, and by the output of the first normal winning opening switch 208c When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the normal 2 The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is released. When it is configured to turn on the out buffer 262f when detected, the first read/write memory 263 stores the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, and the general buffer 262a, which are set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. 262c, general 2 buffer 263c, big winning opening buffer 262e, and out buffer 262d (that is, information indicating whether or not there is a winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening, and guidance to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds) information indicating the presence or absence of a ball) may be sequentially stored together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 . Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, based on each value stored in the first reading memory 263, the role product ratio and the continuous role product The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264, or the total number of balls that have entered each prize winning opening until the timing is reached is calculated for each winning, and the balls are discharged to the ball discharge path before the timing is reached. Alternatively, the total number of spheres that have been hit may be calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . By transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. can do. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is checked. and information indicating whether or not there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263). time) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, information such as which winning opening was won at which time at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at what time the ball was guided to the discharge path at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (that is, the game The inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether it has been fired to an area. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

Further, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches, when the winning of the first start opening 64a is detected by the output of the first start opening switch 208a, Turns on the first 1 buffer 262a, and when the winning of the second starting opening 64b is detected by the output of the second starting opening switch 208b, turns on the first 2 buffer 262b, and by the output of the first normal winning opening switch 208c When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the normal 2 The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is released. When it is detected that the out buffer 262f is turned on, if the first read/write memory 263 has turned on buffers among the buffers 262a to 262e corresponding to the winning openings, The information indicating the winning opening where the prize was won, and the information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball discharge path when the out buffer 262f was turned on, is displayed by the RTC 266 and the time at that time. may be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263, the role product ratio and the continuous role product The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264, or the total number of balls that have entered each prize winning opening until the timing is reached is calculated for each winning, and the balls are discharged to the ball discharge path before the timing is reached. Alternatively, the total number of spheres that have been hit may be calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . By transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. can do. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is checked. and information indicating whether or not there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263). time) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as information such as which winning opening and at what time the ball was won, and at what time the ball was guided to the discharge path (that is, whether it was launched into the game area). become. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, as information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio calculated by the character material ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. If the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300 , the winning balls table 202 e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information indicating whether or not there is a winning ball in each winning opening every 2 milliseconds, which is transmitted from the first read/write memory 263. Then, by using the number-of-balls table 202e, the latest character ratio and continuous character ratio can be calculated and analyzed. It should be noted that the calculated role ratio and continuous role ratio are the values of winnings to each winning slot in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated character object ratio and continuous character object ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300. .

In addition, in the first read/write memory 263, information indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds in each prize winning opening, information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and correspondence to such information. When storing the attached time (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263), the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b and the The information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 when the time comes. In the inspection device 300, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, which indicates whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds at each prize winning opening, and whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds. and the time associated with the information are transmitted, and the winning ball number table 202e set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls in each winning hole for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of the winning balls in each winning hole every 2 milliseconds. By using the number table 202e to calculate the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio for each predetermined section, the possibility of fraud can be analyzed from changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the character product ratio suspected of fraud and the continuous character product ratio, the inspection device 300 receives information indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds in each prize winning opening, and a ball for 2 milliseconds. Since detailed information related to the game such as information indicating the presence or absence of the ball guided to the discharge path and the time associated with the information is input, the role ratio and the continuous role are determined based on this information. It is possible to investigate the causes of changes in material ratios in detail.

In addition, in the first reading memory 263, information indicating the prize-winning opening where the prize was won, information indicating that the ball was guided to the ball discharge path, and the time associated with the information (that is, time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263), when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the first The information stored in the read/write memory 263 may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . In the inspection device 300, the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 indicates the prize-winning opening, the information indicating that the ball was guided to the ball discharge path, and their information. The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the number-of-balls table 202e set in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning opening, and then calculates each winning ball using the winning ball number table 202e. By calculating the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio in the predetermined section, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraudulent activity from changes in the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio. Also, when there is a change in the role product ratio suspected of fraud and the continuous role product ratio, the inspection device 300 has information indicating the prize winning opening and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. Since detailed information related to the game such as information indicating that the game has been played and the time associated with the information is input, the cause of the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be determined based on this information. You can search in detail.

In addition, without providing the first reading memory 263, the first 1 buffer 262a, the first 2 buffer 262b, the general 1 buffer 262c, the general 2 buffer 263c, the big winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262d are set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. (that is, information indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds in each prize opening, and information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) is indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. , and may be directly recorded in the second read/write memory 264 sequentially. In this case, the game state information set in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the game state data of the second reading memory 264 264d, and when the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone, the after-hours information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 and recorded in the game state data 264d. You may make it record. As a result, the first read/write memory 263 can be made unnecessary, so the cost increase of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the area in which information is recorded in the second read/write memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d is recorded (in the second embodiment, the area where the ball number data 264c, the game state data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e are recorded) is calculated and stored in the second read/write memory 264. When transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection public expense 300, the checksum value may also be transmitted. Then, in the inspection device 300, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is received, a checksum value is calculated from the received information, and compared with the checksum value transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207, If they match, it may be determined that the received information is correct and analyzed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inspection device 300 from performing analysis based on erroneous information.

In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and based on the interrupt signal, the CPU 261 executes the inspection result output process to manage the role product ratio. Although the case where the information recorded by the chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and is based on the command transmitted from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. , the information recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300 . As a result, when the inspection device 300 becomes capable of receiving information transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207 and then transmits a command to the role product ratio management chip 207, the inspection device 300 Information transmitted from the material ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

In each of the above embodiments, when the CPU 261 is executing the role product ratio calculation process (first embodiment) or the prize winning information storage process (second embodiment), the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and allocated. When the interrupt signal is generated, while the role product ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is being executed, the execution of the inspection result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal is put on standby, and the role product ratio calculation process or the winning information After the saving process is completed, the execution of inspection result output may be started. As a result, the test result output process is executed during execution of the role product ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, and incorrect information is transmitted to the test device 300 because it is in the process of being written to the second read/write memory 264. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which winning information and the like are transmitted in one direction from the MPU 201 to the role product ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110, but the MPU 201 receives information output from the role product ratio management chip 207 and perform some processing based on that information. For example, when the operation of the role product ratio management chip 207 stops, or when some error occurs in processing in the role product ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Based on the information, the MPU 201 notifies the fact by displaying on the first pattern display device 37, lighting/flickering of the lamp, outputting by voice, displaying on the third pattern display device 81, and the like. may be controlled. As a result, the person concerned with the hall can know the abnormality of the role product ratio management chip 207, and can take some countermeasures. In addition, based on information indicating that the operation of the role product ratio management chip 207 has stopped or information indicating that some error has occurred in processing in the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 The character product ratio management chip 207 may be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the role product ratio management chip 207 can be automatically resolved, and the role product ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 receives the role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 and the ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko The MPU 201 may control the machine 10 to perform the first predetermined notification. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 receives the continuous role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 and the continuous role ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio , the MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to perform a second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, from the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 and the second read/write memory 264, the appropriate role ratio or continuous role ratio is calculated and transmitted to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio received from the character material ratio management chip 207 . As the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Also, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 to turn on or flash a predetermined lamp in a predetermined manner or to output a predetermined sound. Alternatively, a command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 so as to display a predetermined pattern or character on the third pattern display device 81, and the display control device is displayed from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command. Further commands may be sent to 114 . In addition, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the hall computer provided in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, via a relay board (not shown), the first predetermined Information indicating that it is higher than the ratio, or information indicating that the continuous character product ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio may be transmitted. By these reports, the pachinko machine 10 can directly notify the pachinko machine 10 of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10's character product ratio or continuous character product ratio. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that may have been illicitly used can be easily found. In addition, such notification can lead to deterrence of fraudulent actions.

In each of the above embodiments, the character product ratio management chip 207 determines whether the calculated character product ratio or continuous character product ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio. You may output a judgment result to MPU201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform control to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the judgment result received from the character product ratio management chip 207 . Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 itself may execute control for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above determination result. For example, the LEDs that perform these notifications are connected to the role product ratio management chip 207, and the LEDs are driven and controlled when the role product ratio management chip 207 performs the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification. You may Also, the character product ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first pattern display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command Based on this, it may be controlled to turn on/blink a predetermined lamp, output a predetermined sound, or perform a predetermined display on the third pattern display device 81 . Information indicating that the character ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or information indicating that the consecutive character ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio is directly sent from the character ratio management chip 207 to the hall computer. You may make it transmit the information which shows that. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 can also directly notify the pachinko machine 10 of the abnormality in the pachinko machine 10's character ratio or continuous character ratio. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that may have been illicitly used can be easily found. In addition, such notification can lead to deterrence of fraudulent acts.

In the second embodiment, when the character ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the prize balls set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a The case of transmitting the information of the number table 202e to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. On the other hand, in the role product ratio management chip 207, when the inspection device 300 is output to the inspection terminal 207a, or based on the control signal from the inspection device 300, the MPU 201 receives the prize number table 202e , and the winning ball number table 202e transmitted by the MPU 201 in response to the request may be configured so that the character ratio management chip 207 transmits to the inspection device 300. In addition, the inspection device 300 outputs a signal requesting transmission of the number of winning balls table 202e directly to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and directly transmits the number of winning balls table 202e to the inspection device 300. You may make it Also, after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be turned on. You may make it As a result, the role product ratio management chip 207 can eliminate the number-of-balls data setting area 265a and reduce the number of registers.

Further, the main controller 110 may not transmit the prize ball table 202e to the inspection device 300, and the number of prize balls for the inspection device 300 may be set manually. As a result, the main controller 110 does not need to control the transmission of the number-of-balls table 202e.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the number-of-balls table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. good too. As a result, the inspection device 300 can analyze whether or not there is a possibility of cheating due to changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, while also referring to the number-of-balls table 202e.

In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 may be provided between the second read/write memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. good. As a result, even if the read speed of information read from the second read/write memory 264 and the transmission speed for transmitting information to the character product ratio management chip 207 are different, 2. Information can be easily sent from the read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263, the information regarding the character object ratio and the like is recorded in the second read/write memory 264. explained. On the other hand, by configuring the first read/write memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or by supplying a backup voltage to the first read/write memory 263, data can be stored even while the first read/write memory 263 is powered off. It is also possible to configure such that when power is supplied, information regarding the character object ratio and the like may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 . In this way, after being recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated without omission with respect to the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. . Moreover, since the recording to the second read/write memory 264 is performed when the power is turned on, the possibility that the power is completely cut off during the recording to the second read/write memory 264 can be suppressed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power supply is turned off, the CPU 261 automatically controls the CPU 261 based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 to output the information regarding the character ratio etc. to the second The case of recording in the read/write memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263, the timing (trigger) for recording the information on the character object ratio etc. in the second read/write memory 264 is "power off" or "Power supply" may be defined. Then, if the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power off", the power off is detected based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263. , the information about the character ratio, etc. is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", when the power is supplied, the first reading Based on the information stored in the memory 263 , information regarding the character product ratio and the like may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . As a result, according to the setting of the ROM 202f in the MPU 201, the information about the character object ratio and the like based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is recorded in the second reading memory 264 when the power is turned off, It can be done when power is supplied. If "power supply" can be specified as the trigger information data 202f, the first read/write memory 263 can be configured as a non-volatile memory, or a backup voltage can be supplied to the first read/write memory 263, so that the first The read/write memory 263 may be configured so that data can be saved even while the power is turned off.

In each of the above embodiments, in the trigger information data 202f, the "number of shots , 'time', and 'playing time' are specified. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, the "power supply time" may be specified. When information indicating "power supply time" is defined in the trigger information data 202f, information indicating "predetermined time", which is the timing for recording the information on the character object ratio, etc. in the second reading memory 264, is also defined. may For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "power supply time" and information indicating 4 hours as the "predetermined time", the character ratio management chip 207 sets the following in the trigger setting area 265b: At the stage of setting the trigger information data 202f, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is acquired, the acquired time is stored in the memory as the "power supply time measurement start time", and then the time indicated by the RTC 266 and It is determined whether 4 hours have passed since the power was supplied from the difference from the "power supply time measurement start time". Based on the obtained information, information regarding the character product ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 . Then, the time at which the recording was performed is acquired from the RTC 266, and that time is stored in the memory as a new "power supply time measurement start time". It may be determined whether four hours have elapsed from the difference from the "start time". By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the role product ratio by the power supply time, even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 does not play many games, the power supply time has passed for a predetermined time, so that the role can be reliably played. A product ratio and a continuous accessory ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to reliably analyze whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the reliably calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio.

In the second embodiment, the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264, which indicates the total number of winning balls in each winning opening for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the number-of-balls table 202e. On the other hand, when information indicating the total number of balls that have won in each winning hole for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the inspection device 300, based on the information for each timing Then, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio at each timing may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together. Alternatively, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, instead of the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous role are calculated based on the information. The product ratio may be calculated, and the calculated character product ratio and continuous character product ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio, and analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Also, when calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio by the inspection device 300, there is a possibility that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio will be calculated based on the prize ball number table that has been illegally or erroneously set. However, if the character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated in the character ratio management chip 207, the number of prize balls set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on is set in the number of prize balls data setting rear 265a. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the number-of-balls table 202e will be tampered with, and it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio.

In addition, not limited to the second embodiment, the second reading memory 264 does not store information indicating the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio, and the information necessary for calculating at least one of these is not stored in the second reading memory 264. 2 If it is stored in the reading memory 264, the CPU 261 calculates the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300. , the calculated character product ratio and continuous character product ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second read/write memory 264 or instead of the information. As a result, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio, and analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Also, when calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio by the inspection device 300, there is a possibility that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio will be calculated based on the prize ball number table that has been illegally or erroneously set. However, if the character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated in the character ratio management chip 207, the number of prize balls set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on is set in the number of prize balls data setting rear 265a. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the number-of-balls table 202e will be tampered with, and it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio. In addition, if the calculated character object ratio and continuous object ratio are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the inspection device 300 can display the object ratio and the continuous object ratio. is determined to be suspicious, the cause can be investigated based on the information stored in the second read/write memory 264 . In the inspection device 300, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio output from the character ratio management chip 207 are calculated. By judging whether or not they match, it becomes possible to judge whether or not some kind of fraudulent act has been carried out.

In each of the above embodiments, an out switch 208f is provided for detecting the guided ball guided to the ball discharge path, and by counting the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208f, the ball is discharged to the game area. Although the case of counting the number of balls has been described, various methods may be used to count the number of balls shot into the game area. For example, an out-port switch for detecting balls passing through the out-port 66 is provided, the number of balls passing through the out-port 66 detected by the out-port switch and the first winning detected by the first starting port switch 208a. The number of balls passing through the opening 64a, the number of balls passing through the second winning opening 64b detected by the second starting opening switch 208b, and the first normal winning opening 63a detected by the first normal winning opening switch 208c. The number of balls passed through, the number of balls passed through the second normal winning opening 63b detected by the second normal winning opening switch 208d, and the balls passing through the large winning opening 65a detected by the large winning opening switch 208e The number of balls shot into the play area may be calculated by summing the number of . A supply ball detection switch for detecting balls supplied to the ball shooting unit 112a, and a foul ball for detecting balls that have been shot by the ball shooting unit 112a and discharged from the ball guide passage as foul balls without reaching the game area. A detection switch is provided, and the counter counts up by 1 each time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch and counts down by 1 each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. may be counted. Also, instead of the supplied ball detection switch, a shot ball detection switch for detecting the ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a is provided, and each time a ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch, the count is incremented by 1 to detect a foul ball. The number of balls shot into the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by one each time a ball is detected by a switch. A game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area. A counter that counts up by one each time a ball is detected by a switch may be provided to count the balls shot into the game area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the CPU 261 is provided in the role product ratio management chip 207, and based on software executed by the CPU 261, information about the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. On the other hand, a part or all of the functions of the role product ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. By configuring with wired logic, it is possible to manage the information on the character ratio at high speed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the role product ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, the information regarding the role product ratio is recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207, and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 records the information on the role product ratio in the non-volatile memory, and the MPU 201 transmits the information recorded in the non-volatile memory to the inspection device 300. may be controlled to As a result, the MPU 201 itself uses the information about the winning of the balls in each winning hole detected by the MPU 201 and the information about the balls guided to the ball discharge path to another chip, and the information about the character ratio is obtained. Since it can be managed, it is less likely to be affected by noise, and it is possible to more accurately manage the information on the character item ratio.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main controller 110 so that the role product ratio management chip 207 and the main controller 110 are connected. In this case, the role product ratio management chip 110 may be housed in the same board box 100 as the main controller 110, or may be housed in a board box different from the board box 100 in which the main controller 110 is housed. good. When the role product ratio management chip 207 is stored in a substrate box different from the main controller 110, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a substrate box dedicated to the role product ratio management chip 207, or other control may be performed. The role product ratio management chip 207 may be housed in any one of the board boxes 101 to 104 housing devices and the like.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111 or may be provided in the payout control device 111 . Then, the role product ratio management chip 207 may record information on the role product ratio based on the signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit it to the inspection device 300 . In this case, from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, information on winning for each winning opening (for example, balls that have won during a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening ) may be transmitted and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the character product ratio management chip 207 . In addition, in the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, together with the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out), it is possible to determine which prize hole the prize balls are associated with. Based on the prize ball command, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the area corresponding to the prize winning opening where the prize was won in the buffer 262, and the number of prize balls is set in the buffer 262. By adding the number of winning balls obtained to the counter of the corresponding winning hole provided in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning the corresponding winning hole is calculated at the counter for each winning hole. You can count the number. Further, instead of the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the role product ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the information about the role product ratio can be recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . In these cases, in the main control unit 110, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main control unit 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. to the payout control device 111 by a command. Thus, using these pieces of information stored in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110, the payout control device 111 side can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the sound lamp control device 113 , or the role product ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the sound lamp control device 113 . Then, the character material ratio management chip 207 may record information on the character material ratio based on the signal from the sound lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300 . In this case, from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, information about the winning of each winning opening information indicating the number of balls) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the character product ratio management chip 207 . Further, instead of the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 213 of the sound lamp control device 113 may implement the function of the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG. These also allow the character material ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 to record information about the character material ratio and transmit it to the inspection device 300 . In addition, by managing the character ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113, the calculated character ratio, continuous character ratio, etc. can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Commands may be sent to controller 114 . By the display on the third pattern display device 81, the persons involved in the hall can easily find the pachinko game machine 10 with the odd character ratio or the continuous character ratio, and the cheating person can be restrained from committing an unsuccessful act. can be done. Also, when the character ratio management chip 207 or the continuous character ratio calculated by the sound lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraud is suspected), the voice output device 226 Or to output the notification sound, the sound lamp control device 113 performs control such as lighting and blinking the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined manner, in order to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may be sent to the display controller 114 . As a result, the hall personnel can easily find the pachinko gaming machine 10 suspected of cheating, and it is possible to prevent the cheater from committing a fraudulent act. In these cases, in the main control unit 110, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main control unit 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. 110 to the audio ramp controller 113 as a command. Thus, using these pieces of information stored in the RAM 202 of the main controller 110, it is possible to manage the character ratio and the like on the audio lamp controller 113 side.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114 , or the role product ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114 . Then, the character product ratio management chip 207 may record information on the character product ratio based on the signal from the display control device 114 and transmit it to the inspection device 300 . In this case, from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, information on winning for each winning opening (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening information indicating the number of winning balls during the period) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the character product ratio management chip 207 . Furthermore, instead of the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 214 of the display control device 114 may implement the function of the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG. With these also, the information on the character product ratio can be recorded in the character product ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . In addition, by managing the character ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, the control to display the calculated character ratio, the continuous character ratio, etc. on the third pattern display device 81 can be controlled by the display control. Device 114 may do so. By the display on the third pattern display device 81, the persons involved in the hall can easily find the pachinko game machine 10 with the odd character ratio or the continuous character ratio, and the cheating person can be restrained from committing an unsuccessful act. can be done. Further, when the character ratio management chip 207 or the continuous character ratio calculated by the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent activity is suspected), a predetermined display is displayed in the third pattern. The display control device 114 may perform control for displaying on the display device 81 . As a result, the hall staff can easily find the pachinko gaming machine 10 suspected of cheating, and it is possible to prevent the cheater from committing an unsuccessful act. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main control device 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 as a command. Thus, using these pieces of information stored in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 side can manage the character product ratio and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, on the board provided with the main controller 110, or connected to the role ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the role ratio management chip 207, or mounted on the role ratio management chip 207 A display device having a plurality of 7-segment displays may be provided on a board provided with a control device that realizes the function, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be displayed on the display device. Instead of the 7-segment display, the display device is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like with a predetermined number of pixels, so that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed. can be Accordingly, by looking at the display device, it is possible to determine the possibility of fraudulent activity from the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. This display device may display both the role product ratio and the continuous role product at the same time, or may display only one of them. Also, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio may be alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. When the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are displayed alternately, information indicating which one is being displayed may be displayed together. In addition, when the character ratio or the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, when the character ratio exceeds 70%, the continuous character ratio is set to 60% exceeds), the displayed role product ratio or continuous role product ratio may be displayed in a color different from usual or may be displayed blinking. Further, in the display device, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period of time such as 30 seconds, or until the start-up process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110). It is also possible to display the role product ratio or the continuous role product ratio only for a period until a predetermined process is completed, such as a period. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a person involved in the hall can easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent act by confirming the character object ratio and the continuous character object ratio displayed on the display device. . Further, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off, the display device may display the role ratio or the consecutive role ratio. Thus, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a person involved in the hall can easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent act by confirming the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio displayed on the display device. . It should be noted that the display of the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio on the display device when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off may be for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). It may be limited to a period until a predetermined process is completed, such as a period until the power-off process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (for example, until the process of S705 is completed). . In addition, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the display of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio on the display device uses power from a backup power supply, secondary battery, large-capacity capacitor, etc. You can do it. Also, the display device may be accommodated in the substrate box. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display device from displaying an incorrect value.

Further, a button for displaying the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio on the display device is provided, and when the button is operated, the display device displays the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio. good too. As a result, only when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are confirmed, by operating the button, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be displayed on the display device. Wasteful power consumption can be suppressed. Further, the operation of the button may be effective only when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is in a non-execution state, and the display device may display the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. The pachinko gaming machine 10 determines that the game is not being executed. If it is not operated, if the ball launching unit 112a is disabled to launch a ball, or if the ball guided to the play area is detected as being on fire. As a result, it is possible to prevent a cheater from trying to commit some kind of cheating by looking at the character ratio displayed on the display device while playing the game.

Also, the operation of the button may be effective only when it is operated in combination with another button. As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person who does not know the effective combination of button operations from easily displaying the character ratio and the continuous character ratio on the display device. Further, only when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while operating a button for displaying the character ratio and the continuous character ratio on the display device, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed on the display device. may As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a person involved in the hall can confirm the character ratio and the consecutive character ratio displayed on the display device by operating the buttons together. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been some kind of fraudulent act during the business of the company or outside business hours at night. Further, only when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while operating the button for displaying the character ratio and the continuous character ratio on the display device, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed on the display device. may As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a person involved in the hall can confirm the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device by operating the buttons together. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent act before the business of the company or during the business of the day. The display of the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio on the display device by operating the button may be terminated based on the lapse of a predetermined period of time, or may be terminated when the button is operated again. Also, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio may be displayed on the display device only during a period in which the button is continuously operated.

Further, when the button is operated and the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is displayed on the display device, the game mode of the pachinko game machine 10 is set to the check mode, and the main control of the game in the main controller 110 is performed. You can stop it temporarily. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device from changing as the game progresses, making it difficult to confirm the character ratio and the like. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko game machine 10 to the check mode, and at the stage of temporarily stopping the main control of the game, the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114) , may transmit a command notifying that it will transition to the check mode. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive the command notifying the transition to the check mode, for example, a predetermined image (for example, a black screen) corresponding to the check mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 ) is displayed, the variable effect being executed continues to fluctuate at high speed during the check mode period, the sound output from the audio output device 226 is also a predetermined sound corresponding to the check mode, and the sound corresponding to high speed fluctuation may be controlled to output As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko gaming machine 10 has entered the check mode. In addition, the main control device 110 cancels the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and at the stage of restarting the main control of the game, the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114) is set to check mode. A command may be sent to notify that the is released. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 restore the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 to those before the transition to the check mode. can be done.

In addition, in the modified examples described so far, when the button operation is performed, the case where the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are displayed on the display device provided on the board of the main control device 110 or the like has been described. In addition to or instead of this, when a button operation is performed, the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81, the lamp display device 227, etc. display information about the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Alternatively, the audio output device 226 may output some notification sound relating to the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. Also in this case, the modified example described above may be appropriately applied in relation to the button operation.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, a case has been described in which the information related to the character object ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Information related to the role product ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 when a button operation is performed. Also in this case, the modified example described above may be appropriately applied in relation to the button operation.

In each of the above embodiments, the information managed by the role product ratio management chip 206 is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Based on the information managed by the role product ratio management chip 206, the main controller 110 or the like to display the character ratio or the continuous character ratio on the display device provided on the substrate, or to the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81, the lamp display device 227, etc. If it is configured to give some kind of notification by displaying information about the continuous character product ratio or by outputting some notification sound about the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio from the voice output device 226, the inspection is performed. Transmission to device 300 does not necessarily have to occur.

In each of the above embodiments, the large-capacity capacitor 267 or secondary battery is connected to the character ratio management chip 207, and when the power supply to the main controller 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the character ratio management chip 207 , the case where the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to execute the process associated with the power-off has been described. On the other hand, instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the role-product ratio management chip 207 . Thereby, the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 can be retained even while the power is turned off. Further, when a fraudulent person tries to set illegal information in the buffer 207 in the middle of the night, the after-hours information is stored in the after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then at a predetermined timing, the second reading The overtime information can be recorded in the game state data 264 d of the memory 264 .

In the above-described embodiment, when the MPU 201 determines whether or not the transmission of the interrupt signal after setting the buffer 262 was performed in the middle of the night by the processing of S724 (see FIG. 19), the time indicated by the RTC 266 is , the MPU 201 may set the time threshold used for determining whether it is between 0:00 midnight and 6:00 early morning. For example, in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201, late-night time zone judgment time data that defines the threshold value of the time is stored, and during the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is supplied, the number of prize balls table 202e , and the trigger information data 202f, the late-night time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265. FIG. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether or not an interrupt signal has been transmitted after the setting of the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 during the time period indicated by the late-night time period determination time data. Thereby, determination of the late-night time period can be variably set by the ROM 202 .

In each of the above embodiments, when power is turned on to the role product ratio management chip 207, the power-on information is stored in the first read/write memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 together with the time. Also, when power is turned on to the role product ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. As a result, information regarding the time when the power was turned on is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . Therefore, when there is a possibility of cheating due to changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, the cause can be investigated from various aspects, including the time when the power was turned on.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the power to the character product ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut information is stored in the first read/write memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At a predetermined timing, the power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 together with the time. In this case, the first read/write memory 263 may be composed of a non-volatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. Further, when the power to the role product ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first read/write memory 263 does not necessarily need to be configured with a non-volatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. As a result, information regarding the time when the power was turned off is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . Therefore, when there is a possibility of fraud due to changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, the cause can be investigated from various aspects, including the time when the power was cut off.

In the above embodiment, when the power supplied to the main controller 110 is cut off and the processing of S704 to S707 is executed in the main processing of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17), after the processing of S704 is executed, S705 The same processing as the processing of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed before the processing of . That is, in the processing at the time of power failure, after prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing (S704), the values of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, and the big winning opening counter 203h of the RAM 203 are changed. as winning information, the value of the out counter 203i as out information, together with the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, is set in the role ratio management chip 207a, and an interrupt signal is transmitted to the role ratio management chip 207. You may As a result, the power is cut off for the number of balls that have entered the prize winning openings and the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path immediately before the power is turned off, and which are not counted in the character ratio management chip 207. It can be counted by the role product ratio management chip 207 before entering. Therefore, it is possible to record the number of balls that have won prizes in each winning hole and the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path immediately before the power is turned off in the role product ratio management chip 207 without omission.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the "game time", the ball guided to the ball ejection path by the out switch 208f is detected. Although the case where the game time is calculated by counting the time played has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an out-port switch for detecting a ball that has passed through the out-port 66 is provided, and the out-port switch includes a first starting port switch 208a, a second starting port switch 208b, a first normal winning port switch 208c, and a second normal winning port. The game time is calculated by counting the detected time when the passage of the ball to each winning opening or out opening is detected by either the switch 208d or the big winning opening switch 208e. good too. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which it is determined that the player is touching the shooting handle 51 based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the shooting handle 51. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the player rotates the shooting handle 51, or by accumulating the time during which the player touches the shooting handle 51 and rotates the shooting handle 51. A game time may be calculated. Also, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball shooting unit 112a is driven by the shooting control device 112 and the ball is being shot. A game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch counts the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area continues to be detected. By doing so, the game time may be calculated.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON. The fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after there is As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Also, at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, the variation start flag may be set to ON. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of the stop type command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is caused to execute the variation effect on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command. can be done. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame at which drawing processing ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbols consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Further, the third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided. By displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable performance performed by the three-symbol display device 81, a continuous advance notice effect may be performed. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, a continuous advance notice performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role that operates according to various performances and activating the performance in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the first pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the character is operated in a predetermined manner. Or, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the time of fluctuation start, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 is made to perform variation performance, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect in the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect in the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) Prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good too.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113 determines the reception of the continuous notice command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. , and other stop symbol determination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be given an expectation that a big win will finally be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the number of pending balls incremented by "1" The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included as it is and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension. It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, It may be stored in the RAM 223 .

In each of the above embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won, the number of retained balls is counted by the main controller 110 using one retained ball number counter 203a. I explained how to count. On the other hand, in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the number of reserved balls counter for the first starting opening corresponding to the first starting opening 64a, the number of reserved balls counter for the second starting opening corresponding to the second starting opening 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 It is also possible to separately count the number of pending balls associated with starting winnings to the first starting port 64a and the number of pending balls associated with starting winnings to the second starting port 64b.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won, the case where the maximum number of balls that can be held is set to "4" has been described. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting prize to the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting prize to the second starting port 64b are determined and managed separately. good too. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the first starting port 64a is set to "4", and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "4". As, at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls with the start winning to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the number of reserved balls with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "2", even if there are more starting prizes in the first starting port 64a, the starting prizes will not be reserved, but if there are starting prizes in the second starting port 64b, they will be reserved. may As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are separate, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting port 64a may be preferentially performed over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second start port 64b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the starting opening where the variable performance is preferentially performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where two starting holes, the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as the starting holes for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered will be described. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or a plurality of three or more. If there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding reserved ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port. You may make it count the number. Also, for each starting port, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the corresponding starting port may be set.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the command for the number of pending balls sent by the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 to notify that the suspension has been performed with the winning of the starting port It may also include information indicating whether a hold has been made by winning a prize in the starter. Also, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting variation may include information indicating which starting port the variation effect is suspended. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball number counter is prepared for each starting hole, and when a holding ball number command is received, a holding ball number counter for the starting hole indicated by the holding ball number command When the number of held balls is set to , and a variation pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing the number of retained balls counter for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command by 1.例文帳に追加

Further, when a plurality of starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning of each starting hole (starting winning) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to any starting opening is may include information indicating whether Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to which starting port. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a prefetch information storage area is prepared for each start opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main controller 110 in association with the start winning to the corresponding start opening is stored. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start opening that detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect for each starting port can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that won the start prize, in the look-ahead process, whether or not it will be a jackpot for each variable effect, It is possible to correctly determine a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a loss type in the case of a loss, etc., based on which start opening the winning prize is. In addition, when the variable performance based on the start winning to one starting port is given priority to the variable performance based on the starting winning to the other starting port, the variation based on the starting winning to the one starting port Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the performance, and the number of suspension times of the fluctuation performance that will be the most recent big win can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command from the main control device 110 for the value of each counter obtained based on the start winning to the starting port. When the start of the performance is determined, the continuous notice performance may be executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the start opening where the start prize was awarded. In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of starting openings, and in which a variable performance for winning a prize at one starting opening is executed preferentially over a variable rendering for winning a prize at another starting opening, The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the result of the prefetching of the counter value obtained for the prize winning at the start opening where the variable effect is executed. Thus, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the winning to the starting port with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous announcement effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting point with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the starting point with a high priority, the continuous warning effect will end soon. It is possible that there will be a situation where you do not. On the other hand, in this modification, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning to the starting port with the low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not determined for this variable effect. is not started, so you can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of pending balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, variation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 13
), the value (N) of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command set by the fluctuation start process (S307) (see S305 in FIG. 13) is A pending ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the control device 110 to the audio ramp controller 113, and the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio ramp controller 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. You may make it transmit. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 . In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. Also, the variation pattern command may include the value (N) of the pending ball number counter 203a after the subtraction. In this case, the sound lamp control device 112, when receiving a variation pattern command, extracts the number of pending balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and sets it to the number of pending balls stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4 ” may be any number other than . Also, the maximum number of held balls in each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on the winning of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or by dividing the area into four. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls. It may be configured to notify the number.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in such a reduced size that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the role ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and the same as the role ratio management chip or the prize ratio management chip is stored. In the control device that executes the function, the number of wins (symbols aligned on the activated line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of wins during the bonus game period, and the win during the AT period. By counting the number of wins won, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio may be managed.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

a game area provided with a plurality of prize-winning ports including a first prize-winning port having an accessory that operates based on a game;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing a medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for
and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine A1, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with the plurality of prize winning ports including the first winning port having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. be. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out due to the winning of the prize winning port, the number of game media paid out due to the first prize winning port (that is, the operation of the role) can be analyzed, and fraud can be detected based on the character ratio.

In gaming machine A1,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means, and main control means for performing main control of the game;
A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the winning detecting means and the shooting means has won a winning opening, the game medium is paid out based on the winning winning opening of the winning opening. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means; storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to a winning opening; storage control means for accumulating and storing the information in the storage means; and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, the winning detection means detects winning to the winning opening, sets the number of game media to be paid out based on the detection, and based on the set number of game media to be paid out, the number of game media paid out by the paying out means, Storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning slot in the storage means, and outputting signals based on the information stored in the storage means are all controlled by the main control. can be done in the means. Therefore, even if the fraudulent person outputs fraudulent information from the output means and tries to prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio from being hindered due to the output of fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In gaming machine A2,
The game machine A3 is characterized in that the main control means is housed in a substrate box in which a box space and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the main control means is housed in the board box in which the box space and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are unopenably connected, a fraudulent person can transmit illegal information to the output means. to prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio, input of fraudulent information becomes difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to 3,
an external device connecting means connectable to an external device;
an external device connection detection means for detecting that the external device is connected to the external device connection means;
When the external device connection detection means detects that the external device is connected, the output means outputs information to the external device based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by outputting a signal.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connection means, it is detected by the external device connection means. is output by the output means. As a result, by simply connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the game machine, payouts are made to the external device based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, based on the winning in the first winning hole. Since a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of played game media is output from the game machine, there is an effect that fraudulent acts based on the character ratio can be quickly and easily detected.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to 4,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A game machine A5 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won, are output by the output means. Output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a win for each winning hole in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that the character ratio can be easily analyzed based on the signal output from.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A5,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized by storing in a storage means information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by Machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine A6,
The game machine A7 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information on the latest winnings to the winning openings stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first prize winning port includes a second prize winning port having an accessory that continuously operates based on the game,
The storage control means stores information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the paying out means. Cumulatively stored in a storage means,
The output means determines the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means accumulated and stored in the storage means. information relating to the ratio of the number of game media, and information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means A gaming machine A8 characterized by outputting and.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first prize winning port provided in the game area includes the second prize winning port having the accessory that continuously operates based on the game, and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning hole is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. and information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the storage means; , and information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. As a result, the ratio of the number of game media that received the signal output from the output means to the first winning hole (that is, the operation of the accessory) out of the number of game media paid out according to the winning of the winning hole Not only the character ratio that is , but also the continuous character ratio that is the ratio of the second winning opening (that is, the operation of the character when the character operates continuously) can be analyzed, and the character ratio and Based on the continuous character ratio, there is an effect that fraud can be detected more accurately.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means, and main control means for performing main control of the game;
The main control means has a calculation means for executing calculations for performing the main control of the game,
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that at least the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by execution of calculations by the calculation means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the winning detection means and the shooting means has won a prize in one of the winning holes, the game medium is paid out based on the winning hole in which the game medium has won. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means; means are provided. Then, at least, the number of game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, and the storage means is paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole. The generation of information relating to the ratio of the number of game media played and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the execution of calculations by the calculation means. As a result, the detection of the winning to the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of game media to be paid out based on the detection, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means based on the set number of payouts 1. The storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to a winning slot in the storage means by the storage control means, and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, All can be done by the computing unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if the fraudulent person tries to prevent the detection of fraud based on the character product ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, it is difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8,
Equipped with main control means for performing the main control of the game,
The main control means comprises computing means for performing computations for performing the main control of the game,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the said payout means is realized by the execution of calculation by said calculating means,
The game machine B1 is characterized in that the memory control means and the output means are provided in a microchip separate from the effect means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with calculation means for executing calculations for performing the control, and the winning detection means and the game medium shot by the shooting means a payout amount setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning prize opening of the game medium and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the game medium has won a prize; , is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means are provided in a microchip separate from the arithmetic means. As a result, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be increased to the first winning slot without significantly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means by simply providing another microchip. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning. Further, the calculation means outputs a signal based on the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in , and most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means can be applied to the main control of the game.

In gaming machine B1,
The gaming machine B2, wherein the microchip is provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the performance means is provided in the main control means. Accordingly, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts. is stored in the storage means and output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is performed in the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudulent person tries to prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. difficult to enter information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio from being hindered by outputting fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a substrate box in which a box space and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are unopenably connected.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the main control means and the microchip are housed in a substrate box in which the box space and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are unopenably connected, the fraudulent person cannot access the output means. Even if an attempt is made to prevent the discovery of fraud based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information, input of fraudulent information becomes difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means is
In each winning slot, a payout information storage means for storing information on the number of game media to be paid out by the paying out means when the corresponding winning hole wins,
The computing means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
In the start-up process, information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means for each winning hole based on the memory of the payout information storage means when the corresponding winning hole is won, A gaming machine B4 characterized by including a process for transmitting to the microchip.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the payout information storage means stores information on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when the corresponding prize winning hole is won. When the power is turned on to the main control means, the computing means executes start-up processing. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won is transmitted to the microchip. As a result, even if the microchip does not store in advance the information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for the winning of each winning hole, which differs for each model of the gaming machine, the microchip can be controlled by the main controller when the power is turned on. Based on the information transmitted from the means, the character ratio is calculated, or a signal based on the information is output, and the character ratio is calculated for those who receive the signal output from the output means. There is an effect that it can be calculated.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The game machine B5 is characterized in that the microchip comprises second arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations for realizing the memory control means and the output means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the microchip is provided with a second calculation means, and the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means The storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the calculation of the second calculation means. . As a result, by changing the instruction (program) for the operation of the second effect means, there is an effect that it is possible to flexibly cope with the function change and specification change of the memory control means, the output means, and the like.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the microchip implements the memory control means and the output means by wired logic.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the microchip stores information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means by wired logic. and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, processing such as storing and outputting information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device. can be performed at high speed.

In any of game machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6,
The game machine C1 is characterized in that the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even while the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information stored in the storage means and related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is Retains even when the power is turned off. As a result, regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is turned on, the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port are compared with the number of game media paid out by the paying out means over a long period of time. can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, the person who receives the signal output from the output means can analyze the character ratio of the game machine over a long period of time, so that there is an effect that even past fraudulent acts can be detected.

In gaming machine C1,
a second storage means incapable of holding information while the power is off;
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized by storing in a storage means information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by Machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The second storage means cannot retain information while the power is turned off. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, every time a predetermined opportunity comes, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is increased to the first winning hole. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off. Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of performance, the number of times of writing to the storage means can be reduced by configuring as described above, and the above problem of the storage means can be suppressed from manifestation.

In gaming machine C2,
The game machine C3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information on the latest winnings to the winning slots stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
The storage control means stores the above The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the information indicating the winning detected by the winning detection means is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage control means stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. , the information indicating the winning openings in which the winning has been detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored. A signal based on this information is then output. Receiving the signal output from the output means, based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning was detected, the number of game media paid out by the paying out means and the winning to the first winning opening , the number of game media paid out can be calculated, and the role product ratio can be analyzed from these numbers. Then, when a suspicious change is recognized in the character ratio, the cause can be investigated in depth based on the information indicating the winning opening where the winning was detected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably detect fraud based on the role product ratio.

In gaming machine D1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The storage control means causes the payout means to pay out the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred. The information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of the game media put out is accumulated and stored in the storage means. A game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is As information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole, the information is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, the information stored in the second storage means reflecting all the winnings is based on the number of game media paid out by the paying out means and the number of winnings to the first winning opening. As information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out by the number of game media, the information can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D2,
The game machine D3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information on the latest winnings to the winning slots stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A game machine D4 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won are output by the output means. Output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a win for each winning hole in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that it is possible to calculate and analyze the character ratio from the information about the prize output from.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is , is calculated by the ratio calculating means. A signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This eliminates the need for those who receive the signal output by the output means to calculate the ratio (character product ratio), which has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, when trying to calculate the role product ratio in the one that received the signal output by the output means, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening set illegally or erroneously The role ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, since the role ratio is calculated by the ratio calculating means and output, there is an effect that the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated accurately.

In gaming machine D5,
The output means outputs, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A game machine D6 characterized in that it outputs a signal indicating

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the signal indicating the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means calculated by the ratio calculating means are the first A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening is output by the output means. Thus, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (character product ratio) output from the output means, the cause can be searched from the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means, which is also output. has the effect of being able to

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come;
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined based on the information stored in the second storage means. a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening;
The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores the information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined opportunity has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined by the determination means to win a prize in the first winning port based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, the information indicating the calculated ratio is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, since the calculated ratio (character product ratio) is output, the person receiving the signal output by the output means does not need to calculate the ratio (character product ratio), and analysis of fraudulent behavior has the effect of facilitating In addition, when trying to calculate the role ratio by receiving the signal output by the output means, when there is a prize in the corresponding prize opening in each prize opening set illegally or by mistake Although there is a possibility that the role ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means at the time, the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, so the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be accurately calculated. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the role product ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information to be stored in the storage means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed.

In gaming machine E1,
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information on the latest winnings to the winning slots stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the role product ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means, so the information regarding the winning is used. This has the effect of enabling a deeper analysis of the cause of a situation suspected of being a fraudulent act.

In gaming machine E1 or E2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A game machine E3 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won are output by the output means. Output by As a result, when there is a suspicion of misconduct by analyzing the role ratio, the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in the corresponding winning slot is referred to. This has the effect of being able to search for the cause of the situation.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning each winning opening is counted for each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, and the counting is performed for each winning opening. second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The storage control means stores the information stored in the second storage means in relation to the number of game media paid out by the payout means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred. , a gaming machine F1, wherein the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning in each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs is counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening. Information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning hole is stored in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the information indicating the winning game media counted for each winning opening stored in the second storage means is paid out by the payout means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, the winnings detected by the winning detection means are first counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening, so that the winnings to the winning openings are not missed, and the information stored in the second storage means is counted. can be reflected. Then, each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, the information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning port, which reflects all the winnings and is stored in the second storage means, is displayed as the game media paid out by the paying-out means. can be accumulated and stored in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of . Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the storage means stores the total number of game media for each prize-winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, the storage capacity required for the storage means is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the increase. Further, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning slot from when a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1,
The game machine F2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to judge the presence or absence of fraud, including the latest winning status.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A gaming machine F3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won are output by the output means. Output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a win for each winning hole in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that it is possible to calculate and analyze the character ratio from the information about the prize output from.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
The gaming machine F4, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is , is calculated by the ratio calculating means. A signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This eliminates the need for those who receive the signal output from the output means to calculate the relevant ratio (character product ratio), which has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, those who receive the signal output from the output means, when trying to calculate the role product ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening set illegally or by mistake The role ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the game machine F4, since the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated accurately.

In the gaming machine F4,
The output means outputs, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by outputting a signal indicating

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, there is a signal indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning hole from when a predetermined chance occurs until the next predetermined chance occurs. a signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, calculated by the ratio calculating means; Output by As a result, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (character product ratio) output from the output means, the time from when the predetermined trigger, which is also output, is reached to when the next predetermined trigger is reached , there is an effect that the cause can be found from the number of game media that have won in each winning hole.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning each winning opening is counted for each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, and the counting is performed for each winning opening. second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means;
a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come;
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined based on the information stored in the second storage means. a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening;
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores the information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning in each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs is counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening. Information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning hole is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined opportunity has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined by the determination means to win a prize in the first winning port based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, the information indicating the calculated ratio is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, since the calculated ratio (character product ratio) is output, the person receiving the signal output by the output means does not need to calculate the ratio (character product ratio), and analysis of fraudulent behavior has the effect of facilitating In addition, those who receive the signal output from the output means, when trying to calculate the role product ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening set illegally or by mistake Although there is a possibility that the role ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means at the time, the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, so the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be accurately calculated. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the role product ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information to be stored in the storage means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning slot from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to judge the presence or absence of fraud, including the latest winning status. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the role product ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the number of prize-winning openings that have passed from the time a predetermined opportunity arrives to the time the next predetermined opportunity occurs. Since the information indicates the number of game media that have won a prize, the use of this information has the effect of enabling deeper analysis of the cause of a situation in which fraudulent activity is suspected.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A gaming machine G3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won are output by the output means. Output by As a result, the person who receives the signal output from the output means analyzes the character ratio and if there is a suspicion of fraud, in each winning slot, if there is a prize in the corresponding winning slot There is an effect that the cause of the situation can be found by referring to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3,
a second storage control means for storing in a second storage means information relating to winning detected by the winning detection means from the time when a predetermined opportunity occurs until the time when the next predetermined opportunity occurs;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized by storing in a storage means information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by Machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are achieved. . That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means from the time when the predetermined opportunity occurs until the time when the next predetermined opportunity occurs in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to Further, since the second memory means stores only the information about winning detected by the winning detection means from the time when a predetermined opportunity occurs to the next time when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be kept small.

In gaming machine H1,
The game machine H2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information on the latest winnings to the winning slots stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In gaming machine H1 or H2,
The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even while the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information about the prize winning detected by the winning detecting means from the time when the predetermined opportunity occurs until the time when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, which is stored in the second storage means, is held even while the power is turned off. Thus, when the power is turned off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information about the winning that has been stored in the second storage means and has not yet been reflected in the storage in the storage means, thereby improving the reliability of the output signal. There is an effect that it can be increased.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come;
and a power interruption detection means for detecting that the power supply is interrupted,
The storage control means stores a The game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means based on the information about the winning detected by the winning detection means. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that information relating to the ratio of the number of is stored in a storage means.

According to the game machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, effect. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Further, even when the power interruption detection means detects that the power supply is cut off, the payment is made by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media received is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, and even when the power is turned off before the predetermined opportunity occurs, all winnings are reflected and the payout is made. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power supply is turned off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information about the winning that is stored in the second storage means and not reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of .

In gaming machine I1,
A power supply means capable of supplying power for at least a predetermined period even after power is cut off,
The game machine I2, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to at least the memory control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period of time after the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power-off detection means detects that the power is turned off, the storage control means uses the power to store the information about the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. To surely store in a storage means information related to the ratio of the number of game media put out based on the winning to the first prize winning port to the number of game media put out by the payout means. has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine I2,
The gaming machine I3, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the power supply means supplies power not only to the storage control means but also to the second storage means for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Thus, before the situation stored in the second storage means is erased, the payout means is surely paid out based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media received can be stored in the storage means.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even while the power is turned off,
The storage control means stores the winning detected by the winning detecting means stored in the second storing means when power is supplied and when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has not occurred. storage means for storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means A game machine I4 characterized by storing in.

According to the game machine I4, the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3 In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even while the power is turned off. Then, when power is supplied and when it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the payout means is operated based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the storage control means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. . Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means when power is supplied and each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, reflecting all winnings. to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the information about the winning stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage means after the power is supplied. It is possible to suppress loss of information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. has the effect of Further, when it is detected that the power supply is turned off, if the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, the power supply is interrupted while the information is being stored in the storage means. If the power supply is interrupted, there is a possibility that information cannot be stored in the storage means reflecting all the information stored in the second storage means, or that incorrect information is stored in the storage means. is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, so there is an effect that such problems can be suppressed.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The game machine J1 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media ejected into the game area reaches a predetermined number.

According to the game machine J1, the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4 In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media ejected to the game area reaches the predetermined number, the number of game media paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game media are being ejected A ratio (accessory ratio) of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the role ratio at the stage where many game media have won various winning slots and the payout has been performed, so that the averaged role ratio can be calculated. Therefore, since it is possible to eliminate short-term fluctuations in the character product ratio in normal games, it is possible to facilitate the analysis of cheating by those who receive the signal output by the output means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The gaming machine J2, wherein the predetermined timing includes that the current time reaches a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J2, any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 In addition to the effects obtained, the following effects are obtained. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined timing includes the fact that the current time has reached the predetermined time, the payout means can reliably perform the payout by the arrival of the predetermined time even in the situation where the game is not played. It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media (accessory ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably analyze the presence or absence of dishonesty with respect to those who have received the signal output from the output means by using this reliably calculated role product ratio.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the predetermined opportunity includes that the cumulative time of playing the game reaches the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J3, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2 In addition to the effects of the above, the following effects are obtained. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to Further, the predetermined trigger includes that the cumulative time during which the game has been played reaches the predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (accessory ratio) is essentially the number of game balls. It is calculated by performing a trial firing test for 10 hours. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is triggered by the game time reaching a predetermined time. By storing it in the storage means, it is possible to calculate the role product ratio close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that the person receiving the signal output from the output means can be analyzed using the role-thing ratio close to the original definition.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the cumulative time during which power has been supplied has reached a second predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3 In addition to the effects of the above, the following effects are obtained.

That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined trigger includes that the accumulated time during which the power is supplied reaches the second predetermined time, the time during which the power is supplied is the second predetermined time even when the game is not played much. 2, the ratio (character ratio ) can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent acts with respect to those who have received the signal output from the output means by this reliably calculated role product ratio. , B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4,
Equipped with main control means for performing the main control of the game,
The main control means comprises computing means for performing computations for performing the main control of the game,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the said payout means is realized by the execution of calculation by said calculating means,
The memory control means and the output means are provided in a microchip different from the effect means,
The microchip is
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The main control means is
provided with a predetermined trigger information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined trigger,
The computing means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The game machine J5 is characterized in that the start-up processing includes processing for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

According to the gaming machine J5, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4 In addition to the effects of the above, the following effects are obtained. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with calculation means for executing calculations for performing the control, and the winning detection means and the game medium shot by the shooting means a payout amount setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning prize opening of the game medium and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the game medium has won a prize; , is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means are provided in a microchip separate from the arithmetic means. As a result, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be increased to the first winning slot without significantly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means by simply providing another microchip. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning.

Further, the calculation means outputs a signal based on the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in , and most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means can be applied to the main control of the game. Further, in the microchip, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

On the other hand, in the main control means, the predetermined trigger is stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. When the main control means is powered on, the computing means executes start-up processing. The indicated information is sent to the microchip. Here, the storage of the information on the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (character ratio) is Since there is also a physical limit to the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information related to the ratio, instead of fixing the trigger for that storage with a microchip, consider the jackpot probability and probability variation ratio in the game machine. It is preferable that the Therefore, by causing the main control means to store the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage means, and transmitting information indicating the predetermined trigger to the microchip each time the power is turned on, the microchip can be used to play games. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined opportunity that matches the jackpot probability and probability variation ratio of the machine ( There is an effect that the information on the character product ratio) can be stored in the storage means.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5,
a third storage control means for accumulating information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and storing it in a third storage means;
The game machine K1, wherein the output means outputs information indicating the game state of the game machine stored in the third storage means.

According to the game machine K1, any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5 In addition to the effects of ka, there are the following effects. That is, the information indicating the game state of the gaming machine is accumulated and stored in the third storage means by the third storage control means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. As a result, when the signal output from the output means is suspected, the person receiving the signal can analyze the game state of the gaming machine to find out the cause.

In the gaming machine K1,
A door frame covering the front surface of the game area is provided,
The game machine K2 is characterized in that the game state of the game machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is being opened.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, there are the following effects. That is, since the game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the state in which the door frame covering the front surface of the game area is being opened, the one that receives the signal output from the output means , there is an effect that it is possible to judge whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been carried out, from the occurrence situation of the state in which the door frame is being opened.

In gaming machine K1 or K2,
A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming status of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error status of the gaming machine.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, there are the following effects. That is, since the game state of the game machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the game machine, the receiver of the signal output from the output means can determine the state of occurrence of the error state of the game machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K3,
A game machine K4, wherein the game state of the game machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a win state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K3, the following effects are provided. That is, since the game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player, the signal output from the output means is received by: There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been carried out from the state of occurrence of the winning state of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K4,
The game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the winning detection means detects that a prize has been won in any of the winning openings within a predetermined period of time. A game machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are provided. That is, the game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the winning detection means detects that a prize has been won in any of the winning openings within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, those who receive the signal output from the output means can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, based on whether or not there is a state in which a prize has been won outside business hours, such as late at night. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, A gaming machine L1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, A gaming machine L2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

The "ball" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "game medium" in the claims, and the "accessory ratio" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "payout by payout means" in the claims. Corresponding to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out, the "continuous role ratio" described in each of the above embodiments is It corresponds to "the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means" in the scope of claims.
(others)
Conventionally, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and when the game medium wins one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players. In addition, some prize-winning ports are provided with an accessory, and the operation of the accessory affects the winning of game media (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).
By the way, some cheaters fraudulently operate a prize-winning function in which a prize-winning function is provided, or induce a game medium to enter the prize-winning function to win a prize. There are those who try to increase the number of prizes to be awarded to the winning slots. However, measures to detect such fraudulent acts are insufficient.
The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraudulent activity.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
63a 1st regular prize gate (prize gate)
63b 2nd regular prize gate (prize gate)
64a 1st starting gate (winning gate, 1st winning gate)
64b Second starting gate (winning gate, first winning gate)
65a Grand Prize Opening (Prize Opening, 1st Prize Opening, 2nd Prize Opening)
100 board box 110 main controller (main control means)
111 payout control device (payout means)
112a ball launch unit (launching means)
201 MPU (computing means)
202e Award number table (payout information storage means)
202f Trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
207 Character ratio management chip (microchip)
208a First starting port switch (winning detection means)
208b Second starting switch (winning detection means)
208c 1st normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d 2nd normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Big winning opening switch (winning detection means)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 first reading memory (second storage means)
264 second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 capacitor (power supply means)
207a inspection terminal (external device connection means)
300 inspection device (external device)
S152 (Payout number setting means)
S717 (power-off detection means)
S728 (Second storage control means)
S729 (judgment means)
S740, S741 (storage control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (third storage control means)
S761 (storage control means)
S751 to S754, S771, S772 (output means)

Claims (1)

a launching means;
a flow-down area where the game balls shot by the shooting means flow down;
a plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area of the flow-down area;
a game ball guide member provided corresponding to a part of the predetermined area and controlling passage of the game ball to the corresponding predetermined area;
a game value imparting means electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executing a process for imparting a game value to a game;
granting means for granting game balls as the game value;
It is electrically connected to the game value imparting means and imparted based on information relating to passage of the game ball to the predetermined area provided with the game ball guiding member without transmitting/receiving a control signal to/from the imparting means. a process executing means for executing a predetermined process for indicating the game value to be played;
A gaming machine comprising
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information that is information used in a process for imparting a game value to the game and is referenced for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the gaming machine is started and before the execution of the specific process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on ball entry information, which is information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detection means, to the process execution means;
with
The processing execution means is
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means;
execution means for executing the predetermined processing based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage means for storing processing result information that is information relating to the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means;
a display control means for controlling a predetermined display means based on the processing result information;
The first transmission means transmits the reference information signal to the processing execution means regardless of whether or not the reference information is held in the second reference information storage means. game machine.

Images